Contents

Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications PDF

1 of 290
1 of 290

Summary of Content for Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications PDF

Dell EMC DD and PowerProtect Hardware Features and Specifications

7.2-7.6

September 2021 Rev. 05

Notes, cautions, and warnings

NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product.

CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid

the problem.

WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.

2019 - 2021 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Figures........................................................................................................................................ 10

Tables..........................................................................................................................................15

Chapter 1: Physical and Environmental Requirements.................................................................. 21 System operating limits....................................................................................................................................................22

Environmental recovery............................................................................................................................................. 22 Air quality requirements...................................................................................................................................................22 Shipping and storage requirements.............................................................................................................................. 22 Shock and vibration.......................................................................................................................................................... 23

Chapter 2: DD3300......................................................................................................................24 DD3300 system features.................................................................................................................................................25 DD3300 system specifications.......................................................................................................................................25 DD3300 storage capacity................................................................................................................................................ 27 Front panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 27

Left control panel........................................................................................................................................................ 28 Right control panel......................................................................................................................................................30 Front disks..................................................................................................................................................................... 31 Service tag.....................................................................................................................................................................31

Rear panel........................................................................................................................................................................... 32 Product serial number tag (PSNT)......................................................................................................................... 34 Rear SSD....................................................................................................................................................................... 34 NIC indicators...............................................................................................................................................................35 Power supply indicators.............................................................................................................................................35

Chapter 3: DD4200...................................................................................................................... 37 DD4200 system features.................................................................................................................................................38 DD4200 system specifications.......................................................................................................................................38 DD4200 storage capacity................................................................................................................................................40 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 41

Power supply units.......................................................................................................................................................41 AC power extender module....................................................................................................................................... 41 Cooling Fans................................................................................................................................................................. 42 Solid-state drives.........................................................................................................................................................42 Front LED Indicators...................................................................................................................................................42

Back Panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 45 I/O module LEDs......................................................................................................................................................... 45 Management module and interfaces...................................................................................................................... 45

I/O modules and slot assignments................................................................................................................................ 47 Slot addition rules........................................................................................................................................................ 47

Internal system components.......................................................................................................................................... 49 DIMM modules............................................................................................................................................................. 49

DD4200 and ES30 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................... 49 Types of cabinets and power connections........................................................................................................... 50

Contents

Contents 3

Cabling shelves............................................................................................................................................................ 60 ES30 and DD4200 cabling......................................................................................................................................... 61

DD4200 and DS60 shelf guidelines...............................................................................................................................66 Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)............................................................................67 3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks).................................................................................... 68 DS60 and DD4200 cabling........................................................................................................................................ 72

Chapter 4: DD4500......................................................................................................................76 DD4500 system features.................................................................................................................................................77 DD4500 system specifications....................................................................................................................................... 77 DD4500 storage capacity................................................................................................................................................79 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................................... 80

Power supply units......................................................................................................................................................80 AC power extender module...................................................................................................................................... 80 Cooling Fans.................................................................................................................................................................. 81 Solid-state drives......................................................................................................................................................... 81 Front LED Indicators................................................................................................................................................... 81

Back Panel...........................................................................................................................................................................84 I/O module LEDs......................................................................................................................................................... 84 Management module and interfaces...................................................................................................................... 84

I/O modules and slot assignments................................................................................................................................86 Slot addition rules........................................................................................................................................................86

Internal system components.......................................................................................................................................... 88 DIMM modules............................................................................................................................................................. 88

DD4500 and ES30 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................... 88 Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)............................................................................89 Cabling shelves............................................................................................................................................................ 90 ES30 and DD4500 cabling......................................................................................................................................... 91

DD4500 and DS60 shelf guidelines...............................................................................................................................96 Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)............................................................................97 3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks).................................................................................... 98 DS60 and DD4500 cabling...................................................................................................................................... 102

Chapter 5: DD6300.................................................................................................................... 109 DD6300 system features...............................................................................................................................................109 DD6300 system specifications......................................................................................................................................110 DD6300 storage capacity...............................................................................................................................................110 DD6300 front panel.......................................................................................................................................................... 111

Front LED indicators...................................................................................................................................................111 Back panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 113

DD6300 rear SSDs..................................................................................................................................................... 113 Rear LED indicators....................................................................................................................................................113

I/O modules....................................................................................................................................................................... 116 I/O module population rules..................................................................................................................................... 117

Internal system components..........................................................................................................................................119 DIMMs overview......................................................................................................................................................... 119

DD6300 and ES30 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................. 120 Types of cabinets and power connections.......................................................................................................... 120 Cabling shelves...........................................................................................................................................................120

4 Contents

DD6300, DD6800, and DD9300 shelf configurations........................................................................................ 121 DD6300 and DS60 shelf guidelines.............................................................................................................................. 121

shelf configurations................................................................................................................................................... 122

Chapter 6: DD6800.................................................................................................................... 124 DD6800 system features............................................................................................................................................... 124 DD6800 system specifications..................................................................................................................................... 125 DD6800 storage capacity.............................................................................................................................................. 125 DD6800 front panel........................................................................................................................................................ 126

Front LED indicators................................................................................................................................................. 126 Back panel......................................................................................................................................................................... 128

Rear LED indicators...................................................................................................................................................128 I/O modules...................................................................................................................................................................... 130

I/O module population rules..................................................................................................................................... 131 Internal system components......................................................................................................................................... 133

DIMMs overview........................................................................................................................................................ 133 DD6800 and ES30 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................. 134

Types of cabinets and power connections.......................................................................................................... 135 Cabling shelves...........................................................................................................................................................135 DD6300, DD6800, and DD9300 shelf configurations....................................................................................... 135

DD6800 and DS60 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................. 136 shelf configurations................................................................................................................................................... 137

Chapter 7: DD6900.................................................................................................................... 138 DD6900 system features............................................................................................................................................... 138 DD6900 system specifications..................................................................................................................................... 139 DD6900 storage capacity and configurations.......................................................................................................... 140 DD6900 front panel......................................................................................................................................................... 141

Front LEDs................................................................................................................................................................... 141 DD6900 SSD usage and configurations..................................................................................................................... 143 Rear panel..........................................................................................................................................................................144

Rear LEDs.................................................................................................................................................................... 145 PCIe HBAs......................................................................................................................................................................... 146

Slot assignment.......................................................................................................................................................... 146 I/O population rules................................................................................................................................................... 147

DD6900 DIMM configurations...................................................................................................................................... 147 DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities............................................. 148

Chapter 8: DD7200.................................................................................................................... 150 DD7200 system features................................................................................................................................................ 151 DD7200 system specifications..................................................................................................................................... 152 DD7200 storage capacity.............................................................................................................................................. 153 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................................154

Power supply units.................................................................................................................................................... 154 AC power extender module..................................................................................................................................... 154 Cooling Fans................................................................................................................................................................155 Solid-state drives.......................................................................................................................................................155 Front LED Indicators................................................................................................................................................. 155

Back Panel.........................................................................................................................................................................158

Contents 5

I/O module LEDs........................................................................................................................................................158 Management module and interfaces.....................................................................................................................158

I/O modules and slot assignments.............................................................................................................................. 160 Slot addition rules...................................................................................................................................................... 160

Internal system components......................................................................................................................................... 162 DIMM modules............................................................................................................................................................162

DD7200 and ES30 shelf guidelines..............................................................................................................................162 Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks).......................................................................... 163 Cabling shelves...........................................................................................................................................................164 ES30 and DD7200 cabling....................................................................................................................................... 165

DD7200 and DS60 shelf guidelines.............................................................................................................................. 171 Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)........................................................................... 171 3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)...................................................................................172 DS60 and DD7200 cabling....................................................................................................................................... 176

Chapter 9: DD9300.................................................................................................................... 183 system features................................................................................................................................................................183 system specifications......................................................................................................................................................184 DD9300 storage capacity.............................................................................................................................................. 184 DD9300 front panel........................................................................................................................................................ 185

Front LED indicators................................................................................................................................................. 185 Back panel......................................................................................................................................................................... 187

Rear LED indicators................................................................................................................................................... 187 I/O modules...................................................................................................................................................................... 189

I/O module population rules.................................................................................................................................... 190 Internal system components......................................................................................................................................... 192

DIMMs overview........................................................................................................................................................ 192 DD9300 and ES30 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................. 193

Types of cabinets and power connections.......................................................................................................... 194 Cabling shelves...........................................................................................................................................................194 DD6300, DD6800, and DD9300 shelf configurations....................................................................................... 194

DD9300 and DS60 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................. 195 3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks).................................................................................. 196 shelf configurations...................................................................................................................................................196

Chapter 10: DD9400................................................................................................................... 198 DD9400 system features............................................................................................................................................... 198 DD9400 system specifications..................................................................................................................................... 199 DD9400 storage capacity and configurations......................................................................................................... 200 DD9400 front panel........................................................................................................................................................ 201

Front LEDs..................................................................................................................................................................202 DD9400 SSD usage and configurations.................................................................................................................... 203 Rear panel.........................................................................................................................................................................205

Rear LEDs................................................................................................................................................................... 206 PCIe HBAs........................................................................................................................................................................ 206

Slot assignment......................................................................................................................................................... 206 I/O population rules.................................................................................................................................................. 207

DD9400 DIMM configurations.....................................................................................................................................208 DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities............................................ 209

6 Contents

Chapter 11: DD9500.................................................................................................................... 211 System features............................................................................................................................................................... 212 System specifications..................................................................................................................................................... 213 DD9500 storage capacity..............................................................................................................................................214 Front panel........................................................................................................................................................................ 215

Front LED indicators................................................................................................................................................. 215 Solid-state drives....................................................................................................................................................... 218

Rear panel..........................................................................................................................................................................219 Power supply units.................................................................................................................................................... 219 Management module................................................................................................................................................220 Rear LED indicators...................................................................................................................................................221 Available I/O modules.............................................................................................................................................. 222 Ethernet I/O module options................................................................................................................................. 223 Fibre Channel I/O modules..................................................................................................................................... 223 SAS I/O modules.......................................................................................................................................................223

I/O module slot assignments........................................................................................................................................223 Slot addition rules......................................................................................................................................................224

Internal System Components.......................................................................................................................................225 DIMM modules........................................................................................................................................................... 227 Cooling fans................................................................................................................................................................ 227

DD9500 and ES30 shelf guidelines.............................................................................................................................227 Types of cabinets and power connections......................................................................................................... 228 Cabling shelves.......................................................................................................................................................... 229 DD9500 and cabling................................................................................................................................................. 229

DD9500 and DS60 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................ 230 3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)..................................................................................230 DD9500 and DD9800 cabling.................................................................................................................................230

Chapter 12: DD9800...................................................................................................................232 DD9800 system features.............................................................................................................................................. 233 DD9800 system specifications.................................................................................................................................... 234 DD9800 storage capacity............................................................................................................................................. 235 DD9800 front panel........................................................................................................................................................236

Front LED indicators................................................................................................................................................ 236 Solid-state drives...................................................................................................................................................... 239

Rear panel.........................................................................................................................................................................240 Power supply units....................................................................................................................................................240 Management module.................................................................................................................................................241 Rear LED indicators.................................................................................................................................................. 242 Available I/O modules.............................................................................................................................................. 243 Ethernet I/O module options................................................................................................................................. 244 Fibre Channel I/O modules..................................................................................................................................... 244 SAS I/O modules.......................................................................................................................................................244

I/O module slot assignments........................................................................................................................................244 Slot addition rules..................................................................................................................................................... 245

Internal system components........................................................................................................................................ 246 DIMM modules...........................................................................................................................................................248 Cooling fans................................................................................................................................................................248

Contents 7

DD9800 and ES30 shelf guidelines.............................................................................................................................248 Types of cabinets and power connections......................................................................................................... 249 Cabling shelves.......................................................................................................................................................... 249 DD9500 and cabling................................................................................................................................................. 250

DD9800 and DS60 shelf guidelines............................................................................................................................. 251 3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks).................................................................................. 251 DD9500 and DD9800 cabling................................................................................................................................. 251

Chapter 13: DD9900.................................................................................................................. 253 DD9900 system features.............................................................................................................................................. 253 DD9900 system specifications.................................................................................................................................... 254 DD9900 storage capacity and configurations......................................................................................................... 255 DD9900 front panel........................................................................................................................................................256

Front LEDs..................................................................................................................................................................256 DD9900 SSD usage and configurations.................................................................................................................... 258 DD9900 rear panel......................................................................................................................................................... 259

Rear LEDs................................................................................................................................................................... 260 PCIe HBAs......................................................................................................................................................................... 261

Slot assignment.......................................................................................................................................................... 261 I/O population rules...................................................................................................................................................261

DD9900 DIMM configurations.....................................................................................................................................262 DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities............................................ 263

Chapter 14: DS60...................................................................................................................... 265 DS60 overview................................................................................................................................................................ 265 DS60 site requirements.................................................................................................................................................265 DS60 hardware specifications..................................................................................................................................... 266 DS60 front panel ............................................................................................................................................................267 Back panel.........................................................................................................................................................................267 Disk enclosure interior .................................................................................................................................................. 268 Expansion shelf cables....................................................................................................................................................271 Ports...................................................................................................................................................................................272

Chapter 15: ES30.......................................................................................................................273 ES30 overview................................................................................................................................................................. 273 Site requirements............................................................................................................................................................273 ES30 hardware specifications......................................................................................................................................274 Front panel........................................................................................................................................................................274 Back panel.........................................................................................................................................................................276 Ports................................................................................................................................................................................... 277

Chapter 16: ES40.......................................................................................................................278 ES40 overview.................................................................................................................................................................278 Dimensions and weights................................................................................................................................................ 278 Power requiremements..................................................................................................................................................278 DAE-to-DAE copper cabling.........................................................................................................................................280 Product service tag........................................................................................................................................................280

Chapter 17: FS15........................................................................................................................ 281

8 Contents

Overview of FS15 SSD drives.......................................................................................................................................281 Site requirements.............................................................................................................................................................281 FS15 hardware specifications...................................................................................................................................... 282 FS15 front panel.............................................................................................................................................................. 282 Back panel.........................................................................................................................................................................284 Status LEDs......................................................................................................................................................................285

Chapter 18: FS25....................................................................................................................... 287 Overview of FS25 SSD drives......................................................................................................................................287 Dimensions and weight.................................................................................................................................................. 287 Power requirements....................................................................................................................................................... 287 DAE-to-DAE copper cabling.........................................................................................................................................289 Product service tag........................................................................................................................................................289

Index......................................................................................................................................... 290

Contents 9

1 Front panel................................................................................................................................................................ 28

2 Left control panel.................................................................................................................................................... 29

3 Right control panel.................................................................................................................................................. 30

4 Disk LEDs....................................................................................................................................................................31

5 Service tag................................................................................................................................................................ 32

6 Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................................32

7 2 x 10 GbE module................................................................................................................................................... 33

8 4 x 16 Gbps FC module...........................................................................................................................................33

9 PSNT location...........................................................................................................................................................34

10 Disk LEDs................................................................................................................................................................... 34

11 NIC LEDs....................................................................................................................................................................35

12 Power supply LED....................................................................................................................................................36

13 Front panel components......................................................................................................................................... 41

14 System LEDs.............................................................................................................................................................42

15 System LED legend label........................................................................................................................................43

16 Power supply LEDs..................................................................................................................................................43

17 Fan and SSD LEDs...................................................................................................................................................44

18 Features on rear of chassis................................................................................................................................... 45

19 Interfaces on the management module..............................................................................................................46

20 Top view of SP module with SP cover removed............................................................................................. 49

21 Single phase power connections for the 40U-P expansion rack.................................................................. 51

22 Single phase power connections for the DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200................................................ 52

23 Single phase power connections for the Expansion Rack............................................................................. 53

24 Single phase power connections for the DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200................................................ 54

25 Single phase power connections for the Expansion Rack............................................................................. 55

26 Single phase power connections for the DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200................................................56

27 Recommended 3-phase delta power connections for the Expansion Rack.............................................. 57

28 Recommended 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200........................ 58

29 Recommended 3-phase wye power connections for the Expansion Rack................................................59

30 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200.......................................................60

31 Recommended DD4200 cabling........................................................................................................................... 63

32 Recommended cabling for DD4200 integrated with Avamar....................................................................... 64

33 Recommended cabling for DD4200 system with extended retention software or DD Cloud Tier...... 65

34 Recommended cabling for DD4200 with extended retention and integrated with Avamar................. 66

35 Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems....................................... 68

36 3-phase delta power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked).......................................... 69

37 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems..................................... 70

38 3-phase wye power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked).............................................71

39 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems.......................................72

40 Recommended cabling for DD4200 (3TB drives)............................................................................................ 74

Figures

10 Figures

41 Recommended cabling for DD4200 (3TB drives) with Extended Retention Software.......................... 75

42 Front panel components........................................................................................................................................ 80

43 System LEDs..............................................................................................................................................................81

44 System LED legend label........................................................................................................................................82

45 Power supply LEDs..................................................................................................................................................82

46 Fan and SSD LEDs...................................................................................................................................................83

47 Features on rear of chassis................................................................................................................................... 84

48 Interfaces on the management module..............................................................................................................85

49 Top view of SP module with SP cover removed............................................................................................. 88

50 Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems.......................................90

51 Recommended DD4500 cabling...........................................................................................................................93

52 Recommended cabling for DD4500 integrated with Avamar....................................................................... 94

53 Recommended cabling for DD4500 with extended retention software or DD Cloud Tier.................... 95

54 Recommended cabling for DD4500 with extended retention and integrated with Avamar................. 96

55 Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems....................................... 98

56 3-phase delta power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked).......................................... 99

57 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems................................... 100

58 3-phase wye power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)........................................... 101

59 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems..................................... 102

60 Recommended cabling for DD4500 (3TB drives).......................................................................................... 104

61 Recommended cabling for DD4500 (3TB drives) with Extended Retention software.........................105

62 Recommended cabling for DD4500 with DD Cloud Tier.............................................................................. 106

63 Recommended cabling for DD4500 (4TB drives).......................................................................................... 107

64 Recommended cabling for DD4500 (4TB drives) with Extended Retention software.........................108

65 Front LED indicators.............................................................................................................................................. 112

66 Rear LED indicators................................................................................................................................................113

67 I/O module Power/Service LED location..........................................................................................................115

68 Onboard network port LEDs................................................................................................................................ 116

69 I/O module slot numbering................................................................................................................................... 116

70 CPU and memory locations.................................................................................................................................. 119

71 Front LED indicators..............................................................................................................................................126

72 Rear LED indicators............................................................................................................................................... 128

73 I/O module Power/Service LED location......................................................................................................... 129

74 Onboard network port LEDs............................................................................................................................... 130

75 I/O module slot numbering.................................................................................................................................. 130

76 CPU and memory locations..................................................................................................................................133

77 System dimensions................................................................................................................................................ 139

78 DD6900 front panel................................................................................................................................................141

79 Front left control panel status LEDs.................................................................................................................. 141

80 Front right control panel power button LEDs................................................................................................. 142

81 Drive LEDs............................................................................................................................................................... 143

82 DD6900 SSD slot assignment............................................................................................................................. 144

83 System rear panel.................................................................................................................................................. 144

Figures 11

84 Onboard ID and iDRAC LEDs...............................................................................................................................145

85 Slot numbering........................................................................................................................................................ 147

86 Front panel components.......................................................................................................................................154

87 System LEDs........................................................................................................................................................... 155

88 System LED legend label...................................................................................................................................... 156

89 Power supply LEDs................................................................................................................................................ 156

90 Fan and SSD LEDs................................................................................................................................................. 157

91 Features on rear of chassis................................................................................................................................. 158

92 Interfaces on the management module............................................................................................................ 159

93 Top view of SP module with SP cover removed............................................................................................162

94 Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems..................................... 164

95 Recommended DD7200 cabling..........................................................................................................................167

96 Recommended cabling for DD7200 integrated with Avamar...................................................................... 168

97 Recommended cabling for DD7200 with extended retention software or DD Cloud Tier................... 169

98 Recommended cabling for DD7200 with extended retention and integrated with Avamar................ 170

99 Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems......................................172

100 3-phase delta power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked).........................................173

101 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems....................................174

102 3-phase wye power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked).......................................... 175

103 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems..................................... 176

104 Recommended cabling for DD7200 (3TB drives)...........................................................................................178

105 Recommended cabling for DD7200 (4TB drives)...........................................................................................179

106 Recommended cabling for DD7200 (3TB drives) with Extended Retention software......................... 180

107 Recommended cabling for DD7200 with DD Cloud Tier............................................................................... 181

108 Recommended cabling for DD7200 (4TB drives) with Extended Retention software......................... 182

109 Front LED indicators............................................................................................................................................. 186

110 Rear LED indicators............................................................................................................................................... 187

111 I/O module Power/Service LED location......................................................................................................... 188

112 Onboard network port LEDs............................................................................................................................... 189

113 I/O module slot numbering.................................................................................................................................. 189

114 CPU and memory locations................................................................................................................................. 192

115 System dimensions................................................................................................................................................ 199

116 DD9400 front panel...............................................................................................................................................201

117 Front left control panel status LEDs................................................................................................................ 202

118 Front right control panel power button LEDs................................................................................................ 202

119 Drive LEDs...............................................................................................................................................................203

120 DD9400 SSD slot assignment (single node configuration)......................................................................... 204

121 System rear panel................................................................................................................................................. 205

122 Onboard ID and iDRAC LEDs..............................................................................................................................206

123 Slot numbering....................................................................................................................................................... 207

124 Front panel components.......................................................................................................................................215

125 Service LEDs........................................................................................................................................................... 216

126 Power button...........................................................................................................................................................217

12 Figures

127 Front LEDs............................................................................................................................................................... 217

128 SSD drives................................................................................................................................................................218

129 Features on rear of chassis................................................................................................................................. 219

130 Serial number tag location................................................................................................................................... 219

131 Four power supplies..............................................................................................................................................220

132 Management module............................................................................................................................................ 220

133 1000BaseT Ethernet ports...................................................................................................................................221

134 Rear LEDs................................................................................................................................................................ 221

135 Power supply LEDs................................................................................................................................................ 221

136 Location of NVRAM and I/O modules..............................................................................................................223

137 SP module............................................................................................................................................................... 226

138 Releasing a memory riser.....................................................................................................................................226

139 Open fan tray..........................................................................................................................................................227

140 Front panel components......................................................................................................................................236

141 Service LEDs...........................................................................................................................................................237

142 Power button..........................................................................................................................................................238

143 Front LEDs.............................................................................................................................................................. 238

144 SSD drives...............................................................................................................................................................239

145 Features on rear of chassis.................................................................................................................................240

146 Serial number tag location...................................................................................................................................240

147 Four power supplies...............................................................................................................................................241

148 Management module............................................................................................................................................. 241

149 1000BaseT Ethernet ports.................................................................................................................................. 242

150 Rear LEDs................................................................................................................................................................242

151 Power supply LEDs............................................................................................................................................... 242

152 Location of NVRAM and I/O modules..............................................................................................................244

153 SP module................................................................................................................................................................247

154 Releasing a memory riser.....................................................................................................................................247

155 Open fan tray......................................................................................................................................................... 248

156 System dimensions................................................................................................................................................254

157 DD9900 front panel.............................................................................................................................................. 256

158 Front left control panel status LEDs................................................................................................................ 256

159 Front right control panel power button LEDs.................................................................................................257

160 Drive LEDs...............................................................................................................................................................258

161 DD9900 rear panel................................................................................................................................................ 259

162 Onboard ID and iDRAC LEDs..............................................................................................................................260

163 Slot numbering....................................................................................................................................................... 262

164 DS60 front panel................................................................................................................................................... 267

165 DS60 back panel.................................................................................................................................................... 267

166 Fans and disk drives inside the disk enclosure...............................................................................................268

167 Drives as packs...................................................................................................................................................... 270

168 HD-mini-SAS connector....................................................................................................................................... 271

169 ES30 front panel (bezel removed)....................................................................................................................275

Figures 13

170 Front panel LEDs................................................................................................................................................... 275

171 Back panel: Power modules and controllers................................................................................................... 276

172 Power Supply A LEDs........................................................................................................................................... 277

173 FS15 front panel (bezel removed).....................................................................................................................283

174 Front panel LEDs................................................................................................................................................... 283

175 Back panel: Power modules and controllers................................................................................................... 284

176 Power Supply A LEDs...........................................................................................................................................285

177 Rear panel overview............................................................................................................................................. 286

14 Figures

1 Shipping and storage requirements.....................................................................................................................22

2 DD3300 system features....................................................................................................................................... 25

3 DD3300 system specifications............................................................................................................................. 25

4 System operating environment............................................................................................................................ 25

5 DD3300 storage capacity...................................................................................................................................... 27

6 Front disk slot numbers..........................................................................................................................................28

7 Rear disk slot numbers........................................................................................................................................... 33

8 Network daughter card port identifiers..............................................................................................................33

9 Optional 10 GbE module port identifiers............................................................................................................ 33

10 Optional 16 Gbps FC module port identifiers.................................................................................................... 34

11 NIC LED states.........................................................................................................................................................35

12 DD4200 system features....................................................................................................................................... 38

13 DD4200 system specifications............................................................................................................................. 38

14 System operating environment............................................................................................................................ 39

15 DD4200 storage capacity...................................................................................................................................... 40

16 LED status indicators..............................................................................................................................................44

17 DD4200 slot assignments...................................................................................................................................... 47

18 DD4200 and ES30 shelf configuration............................................................................................................... 50

19 Minimum and maximum configurations...............................................................................................................61

20 DD4200 cabling information.................................................................................................................................. 61

21 DD4200 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................... 67

22 Minimum and maximum configurations.............................................................................................................. 73

23 DD4500 system features....................................................................................................................................... 77

24 DD4500 system specifications............................................................................................................................. 77

25 System operating environment............................................................................................................................ 78

26 DD4500 storage capacity...................................................................................................................................... 79

27 LED status indicators..............................................................................................................................................83

28 DD4500 slot assignments......................................................................................................................................86

29 DD4500 and ES30 shelf configuration............................................................................................................... 89

30 Minimum and maximum configurations...............................................................................................................91

31 DD4500 cabling information.................................................................................................................................. 91

32 DD4200 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................... 97

33 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................ 103

34 DD6300 system features..................................................................................................................................... 109

35 DD6300 system specifications............................................................................................................................ 110

36 System operating environment........................................................................................................................... 110

37 DD6300 storage capacity..................................................................................................................................... 110

38 DD6300 AIO capacity............................................................................................................................................. 111

39 DD6300 AIO configuration.................................................................................................................................... 111

40 DD6300 AIO expanded configuration................................................................................................................. 111

Tables

Tables 15

41 Front LEDs................................................................................................................................................................112

42 DD6300 rear SSDs..................................................................................................................................................113

43 I/O LEDs................................................................................................................................................................... 115

44 Onboard network port LEDs................................................................................................................................ 116

45 I/O slot module mapping....................................................................................................................................... 117

46 I/O module slot population rules......................................................................................................................... 117

47 DD6300 memory DIMM configuration...............................................................................................................119

48 Memory locations - CPU 0................................................................................................................................... 119

49 Memory locations - CPU 1.................................................................................................................................... 119

50 DD6300 and ES30 shelf configuration............................................................................................................. 120

51 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................. 121

52 DD6300 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................. 122

53 Minimum configurations....................................................................................................................................... 122

54 DD6800 system features..................................................................................................................................... 124

55 DD6800 system specifications........................................................................................................................... 125

56 System operating environment...........................................................................................................................125

57 DD6800 storage capacity.................................................................................................................................... 125

58 DD6800 DLH SSD requirements........................................................................................................................ 126

59 DD6800 DLH configuration drive layout...........................................................................................................126

60 DD6800 DLH expanded configuration drive layout....................................................................................... 126

61 Front LEDs............................................................................................................................................................... 127

62 I/O LEDs...................................................................................................................................................................129

63 Onboard network port LEDs............................................................................................................................... 130

64 I/O module slot mapping....................................................................................................................................... 131

65 I/O module slot population rules......................................................................................................................... 131

66 memory DIMM configuration...............................................................................................................................133

67 Memory locations - CPU 0...................................................................................................................................133

68 Memory locations - CPU 1................................................................................................................................... 133

69 DD6800 and ES30 shelf configuration..............................................................................................................134

70 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................ 135

71 DD6800 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................. 136

72 Minimum configurations........................................................................................................................................137

73 DD6900 system features..................................................................................................................................... 138

74 DD6900 system specifications........................................................................................................................... 139

75 System operating environment...........................................................................................................................139

76 DD6900 storage capacity and configurations.................................................................................................140

77 HA configuration requirements...........................................................................................................................140

78 Front panel features............................................................................................................................................... 141

79 Front LEDs................................................................................................................................................................141

80 System health and system ID indicator codes................................................................................................ 142

81 Right control panel features................................................................................................................................ 142

82 iDRAC Direct LED indicator codes..................................................................................................................... 143

83 DD6900 SSD configurations................................................................................................................................144

16 Tables

84 SSD boot drives......................................................................................................................................................144

85 PSU FRU LEDs....................................................................................................................................................... 146

86 DD6900 slot assignments.................................................................................................................................... 146

87 Memory configurations......................................................................................................................................... 148

88 DD6900 DIMM configuration CPU 1..................................................................................................................148

89 DD6900 DIMM configuration CPU 2.................................................................................................................148

90 Shelves shipped from factory, in rack...............................................................................................................148

91 Shelves shipped from factory, boxed................................................................................................................148

92 Additional shelves supported...............................................................................................................................148

93 Shelf usable capacities..........................................................................................................................................149

94 Supported shelf count per chain........................................................................................................................ 149

95 DD7200 system features...................................................................................................................................... 151

96 DD7200 system specifications............................................................................................................................152

97 System operating environment...........................................................................................................................152

98 DD7200 storage capacity.....................................................................................................................................153

99 LED status indicators............................................................................................................................................ 157

100 DD7200 slot assignments.................................................................................................................................... 160

101 DD7200 and ES30 shelf configuration..............................................................................................................163

102 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................ 165

103 DD7200 cabling information................................................................................................................................ 165

104 DD7200 and DS60 shelf configuration.............................................................................................................. 171

105 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................. 177

106 system features...................................................................................................................................................... 183

107 system specifications............................................................................................................................................ 184

108 System operating environment...........................................................................................................................184

109 DD9300 storage capacity.....................................................................................................................................184

110 DD9300 DLH SSD requirements........................................................................................................................ 185

111 DD9300 DLH configuration drive layout.......................................................................................................... 185

112 DD9300 DLH expanded configuration drive layout....................................................................................... 185

113 Front LEDs...............................................................................................................................................................186

114 I/O LEDs...................................................................................................................................................................188

115 Onboard network port LEDs............................................................................................................................... 189

116 I/O module slot mapping...................................................................................................................................... 190

117 I/O module slot population rules........................................................................................................................ 190

118 memory DIMM configuration...............................................................................................................................192

119 Memory locations - CPU 0.................................................................................................................................. 192

120 Memory locations - CPU 1................................................................................................................................... 192

121 DD9300 and ES30 shelf configuration..............................................................................................................193

122 Minimum and maximum configurations.............................................................................................................194

123 DD9300 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................. 195

124 Minimum configurations....................................................................................................................................... 196

125 DD9400 system features..................................................................................................................................... 198

126 DD9400 system specifications........................................................................................................................... 199

Tables 17

127 System operating environment..........................................................................................................................200

128 DD9400 storage capacity and configurations................................................................................................200

129 HA configuration requirements..........................................................................................................................200

130 Front panel features..............................................................................................................................................201

131 Front LEDs...............................................................................................................................................................201

132 System health and system ID indicator codes............................................................................................... 202

133 Right control panel features............................................................................................................................... 203

134 iDRAC Direct LED indicator codes.................................................................................................................... 203

135 DD9400 SSD configurations...............................................................................................................................204

136 SSD boot drives..................................................................................................................................................... 204

137 PSU FRU LEDs.......................................................................................................................................................206

138 DD9400 slot assignments................................................................................................................................... 206

139 Memory configurations........................................................................................................................................ 208

140 DD9400 DIMM configuration CPU 1.................................................................................................................208

141 DD9400 DIMM configuration CPU 2................................................................................................................ 208

142 Shelves shipped from factory, in rack..............................................................................................................209

143 Shelves shipped from factory, boxed...............................................................................................................209

144 Additional shelves supported..............................................................................................................................209

145 Shelf usable capacities.........................................................................................................................................209

146 Supported shelf count per chain....................................................................................................................... 209

147 DD9500 system features..................................................................................................................................... 212

148 DD9500/DD9800 system specifications..........................................................................................................213

149 DD9500 storage capacity.................................................................................................................................... 214

150 DD9500 with ES30 SAS shelves........................................................................................................................ 214

151 DD9500 with DS60 shelves.................................................................................................................................214

152 Front panel LED status indicators......................................................................................................................218

153 Rear LED status indicators..................................................................................................................................222

154 Physical to logical port mapping example........................................................................................................223

155 DD9500 I/O module slot assignments............................................................................................................. 224

156 I/O module slot population rules........................................................................................................................225

157 DD9500 memory configurations........................................................................................................................ 227

158 DD9500 and ES30 shelf configuration.............................................................................................................228

159 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................229

160 DD9500 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................ 230

161 Minimum and maximum configurations.............................................................................................................231

162 DD9800 system features.....................................................................................................................................233

163 DD9800 system specifications...........................................................................................................................234

164 DD9800 storage capacity....................................................................................................................................235

165 DD9800 with ES30 SAS shelves....................................................................................................................... 235

166 DD9800 with DS60 shelves................................................................................................................................ 235

167 Front panel LED status indicators..................................................................................................................... 239

168 Rear LED status indicators..................................................................................................................................243

169 Physical to logical port mapping example........................................................................................................244

18 Tables

170 DD9800 I/O module slot assignments............................................................................................................. 245

171 I/O module slot population rules........................................................................................................................246

172 DD9800 memory configurations........................................................................................................................248

173 DD9800 and ES30 shelf configuration.............................................................................................................249

174 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................250

175 DD9800 and DS60 shelf configuration............................................................................................................. 251

176 Minimum and maximum configurations............................................................................................................252

177 DD9900 system features.....................................................................................................................................253

178 DD9900 system specifications...........................................................................................................................254

179 System operating environment..........................................................................................................................255

180 DD9900 storage capacity and configurations................................................................................................255

181 HA configuration requirements..........................................................................................................................255

182 Front panel features............................................................................................................................................. 256

183 Front LEDs.............................................................................................................................................................. 256

184 System health and system ID indicator codes................................................................................................257

185 Right control panel features............................................................................................................................... 257

186 iDRAC Direct LED indicator codes.................................................................................................................... 258

187 DD9900 SSD configurations...............................................................................................................................259

188 SSD boot drives.....................................................................................................................................................259

189 PSU FRU LEDs.......................................................................................................................................................260

190 DD9900 slot assignments.................................................................................................................................... 261

191 Memory configurations........................................................................................................................................ 262

192 DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 1.................................................................................................................263

193 DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 2................................................................................................................ 263

194 DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 3................................................................................................................ 263

195 DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 4................................................................................................................ 263

196 Shelves shipped from factory, in rack..............................................................................................................263

197 Shelves shipped from factory, boxed...............................................................................................................263

198 Additional shelves supported..............................................................................................................................264

199 Shelf usable capacities.........................................................................................................................................264

200 Supported shelf count per chain....................................................................................................................... 264

201 DS60 shelf set support........................................................................................................................................ 265

202 Site requirements.................................................................................................................................................. 265

203 Hardware specifications...................................................................................................................................... 266

204 LED status lights....................................................................................................................................................267

205 Status lights visible from rear of disk enclosure............................................................................................268

206 LED status lights................................................................................................................................................... 268

207 Physical drives........................................................................................................................................................270

208 HD-mini-SAS to mini-SAS cable part numbers............................................................................................... 271

209 HD-mini-SAS to ES30 host and ES30 expansion port cable part numbers............................................. 271

210 ES30 shelves in a set............................................................................................................................................273

211 Site requirements.................................................................................................................................................. 273

212 ES30 hardware specifications............................................................................................................................ 274

Tables 19

213 System operating environment.......................................................................................................................... 274

214 Status lights visible from front of disk enclosure.......................................................................................... 275

215 Status lights visible from rear of disk enclosure............................................................................................ 277

216 ES40 shelves in a set............................................................................................................................................278

217 Dimensions and weight.........................................................................................................................................278

218 AC power specifications...................................................................................................................................... 279

219 DC power specifications...................................................................................................................................... 279

220 Number of SSD drives and model compatibilty.............................................................................................. 281

221 FS15 site requirements......................................................................................................................................... 281

222 FS15 hardware specifications.............................................................................................................................282

223 Status lights visible from front of disk enclosure.......................................................................................... 283

224 Status lights visible from rear of disk enclosure............................................................................................285

225 Status LEDs............................................................................................................................................................ 286

226 Number of SSD drives and model compatibilty..............................................................................................287

227 Dimensions and weight.........................................................................................................................................287

228 AC power specifications...................................................................................................................................... 288

229 DC power specifications......................................................................................................................................288

20 Tables

Physical and Environmental Requirements This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

System operating limits Air quality requirements Shipping and storage requirements Shock and vibration

1

Physical and Environmental Requirements 21

System operating limits The ambient temperature specification is measured at the front bezel inlet. The site must have air conditioning of the correct size and placement to maintain the specified ambient temperature range and offset the heat dissipation listed below.

NOTE: For systems mounted in a cabinet, the operating limits listed above must not be exceeded inside the closed cabinet.

Equipment mounted directly above or below an enclosure must not restrict the front-to-rear airflow of the storage system.

Cabinet doors must not impede the front-to-rear airflow. The cabinet must exhaust air at a rate that is equal to or greater

than the sum of the exhaust rates of all the equipment mounted in the cabinet.

Environmental recovery

If the system exceeds the maximum ambient temperature by approximately 10C (18F), the storage processors (SPs) in the processor enclosure begin an orderly shutdown that saves cached data, and then shut themselves down. Link control cards (LCCs) in each DAE power down their disks but remain powered on. If the system detects that the temperature has dropped to an acceptable level, it restores power to the SPs and the LCCs restore power to their disk drives.

Air quality requirements The products are designed to be consistent with the requirements of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Environmental Standard Handbook and the most current revision of Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments, Second Edition, ASHRAE 2009b.

Cabinets are best suited for Class 1 datacom environments, which consist of tightly controlled environmental parameters, including temperature, dew point, relative humidity and air quality. These facilities house mission-critical equipment and are typically fault-tolerant, including the air conditioners.

The data center should maintain a cleanliness level as identified in ISO 14664-1, class 8 for particulate dust and pollution control. The air entering the data center should be filtered with a MERV 11 filter or better. The air within the data center should be continuously filtered with a MERV 8 or better filtration system. In addition, efforts should be maintained to prevent conductive particles, such as zinc whiskers, from entering the facility.

The allowable relative humidity level is 20 to 80% non condensing, however, the recommended operating environment range is 40 to 55%. For data centers with gaseous contamination, such as high sulfur content, lower temperatures and humidity are recommended to minimize the risk of hardware corrosion and degradation. In general, the humidity fluctuations within the data center should be minimized. It is also recommended that the data center be positively pressured and have air curtains on entry ways to prevent outside air contaminants and humidity from entering the facility.

For facilities below 40% relative humidity, it is recommended to use grounding straps when contacting the equipment to avoid the risk of Electrostatic discharge (ESD), which can harm electronic equipment.

As part of an ongoing monitoring process for the corrosiveness of the environment, it is recommended to place copper and silver coupons (per ISA 71.04-1985, Section 6.1 Reactivity), in airstreams representative of those in the data center. The monthly reactivity rate of the coupons should be less than 300 Angstroms. When monitored reactivity rate is exceeded, the coupon should be analyzed for material species and a corrective mitigation process put in place.

Storage time (unpowered) recommendation: do not exceed 6 consecutive months of unpowered storage.

Shipping and storage requirements NOTE: Systems and components must not experience changes in temperature and humidity that are likely to cause

condensation to form on or in that system or component. Do not exceed the shipping and storage temperature gradient of

45F/hr (25C/hr).

Table 1. Shipping and storage requirements

Requirement Description

Ambient temperature -40 F to 149F (-40C to 65C)

Temperature gradient 45F/hr (25C/hr)

22 Physical and Environmental Requirements

Table 1. Shipping and storage requirements (continued)

Requirement Description

Relative humidity 10% to 90% noncondensing

Elevation -50 to 35,000 ft (-16 to 10,600 m)

Storage time (unpowered) Recommendation Do not exceed 6 consecutive months of unpowered storage.

Shock and vibration Products have been tested to withstand the shock and random vibration levels. The levels apply to all three axes and should be measured with an accelerometer on the equipment enclosures within the cabinet and shall not exceed:

Platform condition Response measurement level

Non operational shock 10 Gs, 7 ms duration

Operational shock 3 Gs, 11 ms duration

Non operational random vibration 0.40 Grms, 5500 Hz, 30 minutes

Operational random vibration 0.21 Grms, 5500 Hz, 10 minutes

Systems that are mounted on an approved package have completed transportation testing to withstand the following shock and vibrations in the vertical direction only and shall not exceed:

Packaged system condition Response measurement level

Transportation shock 10 Gs, 12ms duration

Transportation random vibration 1.15 Grms 1 hour Frequency range 1200 Hz

Physical and Environmental Requirements 23

DD3300 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD3300 system features DD3300 system specifications DD3300 storage capacity Front panel Rear panel

2

24 DD3300

DD3300 system features Table 2. DD3300 system features

Feature 4 TB configuration 8 TB configuration 16 TB configuration 32 TB configuration

Rack Height

2U, supported in four-post racks only

Power 1 or 2 hot-swappable power units

Fans 6 hot swappable fans, installed in two fan assemblies (3 fans per fan assembly)

Rack mounting

Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.976.2 cm).

Processor 1 x 8-core Intel 4110 series, hyperthreaded

Voltage 100240 V~. Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz.

Internal 3.5" drives (front)

4 x 4 TB HDD 10 x 4 TB HDD 10 x 4 TB HDD 12 x 4 TB HDD

Internal 3.5" drives (middle)

N/A N/A N/A 4 x 4 TB HDD

Internal 3.5" drives (rear)

N/A 1 x 480 GB SSD for NVRAMa

NIC 4 x 1 GbE or 4 x 10 GbE (always present)b + 2 x 10 GbE (optional)

FC (DD VTL only)

4 x 16 Gbps (optional)

Memory 16 GB or 24 GBc 48 GB 48 GB or 56 GBd 64 GB

a. The SSD is for use as an NVRAM device, SSD Cache Tier storage only, and Random I/O handling (Instant Access Instant Restore). The maximum supported SSD Cache Tier capacity is one percent of the Active Tier capacity.

b. Starting with DD OS 6.2, DD3300 systems ship with a 4 x 10 GbE RJ-45 network daughter card. c. 24 GB of memory is required to use the FC module for DD VTL. d. A 16 TB system will have 56 GB of memory if it was a 4 TB system equipped with the FC module, and was later upgraded

to 16 TB.

NOTE: DD OS may report less storage and memory than indicated in this table. The unreported resources are used for

internal system processes.

DD3300 system specifications Table 3. DD3300 system specifications

Watts BTU/hr Weight Width Depth Height

750 2891 72.91 lb/33.1 kg 17.09 in/43.4 cm 28.17 inches/71.55 cm

3.42 in/8.68 cm

Table 4. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

DD3300 25

Table 4. System operating environment (continued)

Operating Acoustic Noise Sound power, LWAd: 7.52 bels. Sound pressure, LpAm: 56.4 dB. (Declared noise emission per ISO 9296.)

26 DD3300

DD3300 storage capacity The table lists the capacities of the systems. The system internal indexes and other product components use variable amounts of storage, depending on the type of data and the sizes of files. If you send different datasets to otherwise identical systems, one system may, over time, have room for more or less actual backup data than another.

Table 5. DD3300 storage capacity

Configuratio n

Internal disks - physicalab

Internal disks - virtual

Raw storage Usable storage (local)c

Cloud storage SSD metadata cache storage

4 TB capacity /16 GB memory

4 x 4 TB 7200 RPM NLSAS

1 x 4 TB for Active Tier

1 x 1 TB for DD Cloud Tier metadata

16 TB 4 TB 8 TB N/A

8 TB capacity/48 GB memory

10 x 4 TB 7200 RPM NLSAS

4 x 4 TB for Active Tierd

2 x 1 TB for DD Cloud Tier metadata

40 TB 8 TB 16 TB 160 GB

16 TB capacity/48 GB memory

10 x 4 TB 7200 RPM NLSAS

4 x 4 TB for Active Tier

2 x 1 TB for DD Cloud Tier metadata

40 TB 16 TB 32 TB 160 GB

32 TB capacity/64 GB memory

12 x 4 TB 7200 RPM NLSAS (front)

4 x 4 TB 7200 RPM NLSAS (middle)

8 x 4 TB for Active Tier

4 x 1 TB for DD Cloud Tier metadata

64 TB 32 TB 64 TB 320 GB

a. The internal hard drives are configured in a RAID6 configuration. RAID6 provides the system with the ability to withstand the simultaneous failure of two hard drives, or the failure of one hard drive while another hard drive is still rebuilding after a drive replacement operation.

b. After replacing a disk, it takes approximately 18 hours to complete the rebuild operation on the new disk, but may take longer depending on the amount of activity on the system.

c. The system compensates for the required file system overhead, so the reported usable capacity matches the specified usable capacity.

d. For 8 TB configurations, the Active Tier supports a maximum of 2 x 4 TB virtual disks.

Front panel The DD3300 front panel consists of two control panels, which contain system LEDs and ports, twelve 3.5" disk drive bays, and the service tag. Front panel on page 28 shows the locations of the front panel components.

DD3300 27

Figure 1. Front panel

1. Left control panel 2. 3.5" disk drive 3. Right control panel 4. Service tag.

Disk layout

The following table shows the physical location of each disk slot.

NOTE: Although the physical slots are numbered starting from 0, the software identifies the slots starting at 1.

Table 6. Front disk slot numbers

Slot 0 (SW slot 1) Slot 3 (SW slot 4) Slot 6 (SW slot 7) Slot 9 (SW slot 10)

Slot 1 (SW slot 2) Slot 4 (SW slot 5) Slot 7 (SW slot 8) Slot 10 (SW slot 11)

Slot 2 (SW slot 3) Slot 5 (SW slot 6) Slot 8 (SW slot 9) Slot 11 (SW slot 12)

Left control panel

The left control panel contains system status LEDs. Left control panel on page 29 shows the panel.

28 DD3300

Figure 2. Left control panel

1. System status LEDs 2. System health and system ID indicator 3. iDRAC Quick Sync 2 wireless indicator (Not supported)

The system status LEDs turn solid amber if the system experiences an error in any of the following categories. Under normal operating conditions, the system status LEDs remain off. From top to bottom, the five system status LEDs are:

Drive indicator Temperature indicator Electrical indicator Memory indicator PCIe indicator

The system health and system ID indicator has the following states:

DD3300 29

Solid blue: Indicator is in system health mode. System is on and healthy. Blinking blue: Indicator is in system ID mode.

NOTE: Press the System Health and System ID button to switch the indicator between system health and system ID

modes.

Solid amber: System is in fail-safe mode. Blinking amber: System is experiencing a fault.

Right control panel

The right control panel contains the system power button, and system maintenance ports. Right control panel on page 30 shows the panel.

Figure 3. Right control panel

30 DD3300

1. Power button 2. Not Supported -- 2 x USB 2.0 ports (Not supported) 3. Not Supported -- iDRAC Direct port (micro USB 2.0) 4. iDRAC Direct LED 5. Not Used -- VGA port

Front disks

The DD3300 system contains 4, 10, or 12 front-mounted 3.5" HDDs, depending on the capacity configuration. Each HDD has an activity indicator, and a status indicator. Disk LEDs on page 31 shows the HDD indicators.

Figure 4. Disk LEDs

1. HDD activity indicator 2. HDD status indicator

The HDD activity indicator blinks during drive activity.

The HDD status indicator has the following states:

Flashes green twice per second: Identifying drive or preparing for removal. Off: Drive is ready for removal. Flashes green, then amber, then turns off: Predicted drive failure. Flashes amber four times per second: Drive failed. Solid green: Drive online. Flashes green slowly: Drive rebuilding. Flashes green for three seconds, then amber for three seconds, then turns off: Rebuild stopped.

Service tag

The DD3300 system service tag is located at the front of the system, in the lower right-hand corner of the chassis. This tag is on all DD3300 systems, and includes the product serial number.

DD3300 31

Figure 5. Service tag

1. Information tag (top view) 2. Information tag (back view) 3. OpenManage Mobile (OMM) label 4. iDRAC MAC address and secure password label 5. Service tag

Rear panel The DD3300 rear panel contains the system serial port, NIC cards, power supplies, and 3.5" drive bays. shows the rear of the system.

Figure 6. Rear panel

1. Full height PCIe expansion card slots The top slot is for the optional 2 x 10 GbE NIC The middle slot is for the optional 4 x 16 Gbps FC module The bottom slot is not supported

2. Not Supported -- Half height PCIe expansion card slot 3. Rear handle 4. 3.5" drive bays (used for 1 x 480 GB SSD in the 8 TB, 16 TB, and 32 TB configurations) 5. Power supply units (1 or 2)

32 DD3300

6. Network daughter card Ethernet ports 7. Not Supported -- USB 3.0 ports 8. Not Supported -- VGA port 9. Serial port 10. iDRAC9 dedicated management port 11. System identification button

The DD3300 system supports the use of the iDRAC9 dedicated management port to emulate a serial console.

Disk layout

8 TB, 16 TB, and 32 TB configurations use one rear slot for an SSD. 4 TB configurations do not use an SSD. The following table shows the physical location of the rear SSD slots.

NOTE: Although the physical slots are numbered starting from 0, the software identifies the slots starting at 1.

Table 7. Rear disk slot numbers

Slot 12 (SW slot 13) Slot 13 (SW slot 14)

Network port layout

The DD3300 network daughter card provides 4 x 1 GbE or 4 x 10 GbE network ports for network connectivity.

NOTE: Starting with DD OS 6.2, DD3300 systems ship with a 4 x 10 GbE RJ-45 network daughter card.

The following table lists the layout of the network daughter card ports.

Table 8. Network daughter card port identifiers

ethMa ethMb ethMc ethMd

An optional 2 x 10 GbE module is supported on the DD3300 system.

Figure 7. 2 x 10 GbE module

The following table lists the layout of the 10 GbE ports.

NOTE: The 10 GbE module is inserted upside down, therefore the ports are in descending order from left to right.

Table 9. Optional 10 GbE module port identifiers

eth1b eth1a

FC port layout

An optional 4 x 16 Gbps FC module is supported on the DD3300 system.

Figure 8. 4 x 16 Gbps FC module

DD3300 33

The following table lists the layout of the FC ports.

Table 10. Optional 16 Gbps FC module port identifiers

22d 22c 22b 22a

Product serial number tag (PSNT)

Some DD3300 systems have a PSNT tag located on the rear of the system, attached to the arm in the center of the chassis. If this tag is not present, the product serial number is always available from the service tag located on the front of the system.

NOTE: Service tag on page 31 describes the front-mounted service tag.

Figure 9. PSNT location

If present, the PSNT lists the part number (PN) and serial number (SN) of the system. The PN is 900-555-024. The SN is the 14 digit alphanumeric string that accompanies the part number. This serial number is the default system password for serial console, system manager, and iDRAC access.

Rear SSD

The DD3300 8 TB, 16 TB, and 32 TB configurations use one rear-mounted 480 GB 2.5" SSD. The SSD has an activity indicator, and a status indicator.

Figure 10. Disk LEDs

1. HDD activity indicator 2. HDD status indicator

The HDD activity indicator blinks during drive activity.

The HDD status indicator has the following states:

Flashes green twice per second: Identifying drive or preparing for removal. Off: Drive is ready for removal. Flashes green, then amber, then turns off: Predicted drive failure. Flashes amber four times per second: Drive failed. Solid green: Drive online.

34 DD3300

NIC indicators

All network ports on the DD3300 system have link and activity LED indicators.

Figure 11. NIC LEDs

1. Link LED indicator 2. Activity LED indicator

The NIC LEDs have the following states:

Table 11. NIC LED states

Link indicator state Activity indicator state Meaning

Green Blinking green The NIC is connected to a valid network at its maximum port speed and data is being sent or received.

Amber Blinking green The NIC is connected to a valid network at less than its maximum port speed and data is being sent or received.

Green Off The NIC is connected to a valid network at its maximum port speed and data is not being sent or received.

Amber Off The NIC is connected to a valid network at less than its maximum port speed and data is not being sent or received.

Blinking green Off NIC identify is enabled through the NIC configuration utility.

Power supply indicators

The power supply unit has an illuminated, translucent handle that functions as a status LED.

DD3300 35

Figure 12. Power supply LED

The indicator has the following states:

Green: Valid power source is connected, and the PSU is operational. Blinking amber: Indicates a problem with the PSU. Off: Power is not connected. Blinking green: Firmware update is in progress.

CAUTION: Do not disconnect the power cord or unplug the PSU when updating firmware. If firmware update

is interrupted, the PSUs do not function.

Blinking green, then off: When hot-plugging a PSU, the PSU handle blinks green five times at a rate of 4 Hz and turns off. This indicates a PSU mismatch with respect to efficiency, feature set, health status, or supported voltage.

36 DD3300

DD4200 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD4200 system features DD4200 system specifications DD4200 storage capacity Front Panel Back Panel I/O modules and slot assignments Internal system components DD4200 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD4200 and DS60 shelf guidelines

3

DD4200 37

DD4200 system features The table summarizes the DD4200 system features.

Table 12. DD4200 system features

Feature DD4200 (Base configuration)

Rack height 4U, supported in four-post racks only

Rack mounting Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.9 - 76.2 cm).

Power 1 +1 redundant, hot-swappable power units

Processor Two 8-core processors

NVRAM One 4-GB NVRAM module (and companion BBU) for data integrity during a power outage

Fans Hot-swappable, redundant, 5

Memory 16 x 8 GB DIMM (128 GB)

Internal drives SSD drives, 3 x 200 GB (base 10)

I/O module slots Nine replaceable I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots, one BBU, one NVRAM, and one Management module slot. See Management module and interfaces on page 45 and I/O modules and slot assignments on page 47.

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 8 x 2-TB or 5 x 3-TB shelves adding up to 189 TB of usable external capacity.

DD Cloud Tier 189 TB of Active Tier capacity, and 378 TB of Cloud Tier capacity. 2x3 TB shelves are required to store DD Cloud Tier metadata.

DD Extended Retention 24 x 2-TB or 16 x 3-TB shelves adding up to 378 TB of usable external capacity. If lower-capacity 1 TB-drive-based shelves are used, the maximum configuration will also be limited by a maximum shelf count of 32.

DD4200 system specifications

Table 13. DD4200 system specifications

Model Watts BTU/hr Power Weight Width Depth Height

DD4200 800 2730 800 80 lb / 36.3 kg

17.5 in (44.5 cm)

33 in (84 cm) 7 in (17.8 cm)

38 DD4200

Table 14. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

Operating Acoustic Noise Sound power, LWAd: 7.52 bels. Sound pressure, LpAm: 56.4 dB. (Declared noise emission per ISO 9296.)

DD4200 39

DD4200 storage capacity Data Domain system internal indexes and other product components use variable amounts of storage, depending on the type of data and the sizes of files. If you send different data sets to otherwise identical systems, one system may, over time, have room for more or less actual backup data than another.

Table 15. DD4200 storage capacity

System/ Installed Memory

Internal Disks (SATA SSDs)

Data Storage Space External Storage3

DD4200

(2 SAS I/O modules)

128 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

189 TB Up to a maximum of 8 x 2-TB or 5 x 3-TB shelves.

DD4200 with DD Cloud Tier1

(3 SAS I/O modules)

128 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

189 TB (Active Tier) 72 TB (DD Cloud Tier

metadata) 378 TB (DD Cloud Tier)

Up to a maximum of 8 x 2-TB or 5 x 3-TB shelves.

2x3-TB shelves for DD Cloud Tier metadata.

DD4200 with Extended Retention software1 (4 SAS I/O modules)

128 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

378 TB Up to a maximum of 16 x 2-TB and 10 x 3-TB shelves.

1. Data Domain DD4200 controller with DD Extended Retention software.

2. Data Domain DD4200 controller with DD Cloud Tier.

3. The capacity will differ depending on the size of the external storage shelves used. This data based on ES30 shelves.

40 DD4200

Front Panel The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the front of the system.

Figure 13. Front panel components

(1) Filler panel

(2) The red box indicates the system processor (SP) module

(3) SSD drive #1

(4) Fan #0

(5) Power supply #B

(6) AC power disconnect plug

(7) AC power extender module

Power supply units

A system has two power supply units, numbered A and B from the bottom up. Each power supply has its own integral cooling fan. Each power unit has three LEDs (see System LED legend label on page 43) that indicates the following states:

AC LED: Glows green when AC input is good DC LED: Glows green when DC output is good Symbol !: Glows solid or blinking amber for fault or attention

The AC power plugs are located to the right of each power supply. These plugs are pulled to disconnect AC power to each power supply.

AC power extender module

AC power entry is connected at the rear of the system. The AC power extender module provides power to the two power supplies on the front of the system. AC Power plugs are located in the front. The module is adjacent to the SP module and can be removed and replaced.

DD4200 41

Cooling Fans

A system contains five hot-swappable cooling fans in a 4+1 redundant configuration. The fans provide cooling for the processors, DIMMs, IO modules, and the management module. Each fan has a fault LED which causes the fan housing to glow amber. A system can run with one fan faulted or removed.

Solid-state drives

A system contains three hot-swappable 2.5" solid-state drive (SSD) bays that are located in the front and on top of the fan modules. There are four drive bays, with the left-most bay containing a blank. The next drive to the right of the blank is SSD #1, the next is #2, and the right-most bay contains SSD #3. No user backup data is kept on the SSDs.

Each drive has a blue colored power LED and an amber fault LED.

Front LED Indicators

The photo below indicates the location of the four system LEDs.

Figure 14. System LEDs

The next photo shows the location of the system LED legend label. Power supply LEDs on page 43 shows the power supply LEDs. Other front LEDs are shown in Fan and SSD LEDs on page 44. LED states are described in LED status indicators on page 44.

42 DD4200

Figure 15. System LED legend label

The power supply LEDs include:

AC LED on top DC LED in the middle Failure LED on the bottom

Figure 16. Power supply LEDs

Each SSD has two LEDs as shown in the following figure. The lower left corner of the housing around each fan acts as an LED, glowing amber when the fan has failed.

DD4200 43

Figure 17. Fan and SSD LEDs

Table 16. LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

System Dot within a circle (top LED) Blue indicates power on and normal operation.

System, SP fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates failure.

System, chassis fault Exclamation point within a triangle with a light below

Dark indicates normal operation. Yellow indicates a fault condition.

System Marked out hand within a black square (bottom LED)

White warms not to remove the unit.

Power supply AC LED Steady green indicates normal AC power.

Power supply DC LED Steady green indicates normal DC power.

Power supply Failure LED Solid amber indicates a failed power supply.

SSD Top LED Solid blue, disk ready, blinks while busy.

SSD Bottom LED Dark indicates healthy. Solid amber indicates disk fail.

Fan Fan housing The fan housing glows an amber color during fan failure.

44 DD4200

Back Panel The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the back of the system.

Figure 18. Features on rear of chassis

1. Upper level contains all blanks 2. AC power extender module 3. Management module (slot Mgmt A) 4. Red box indicating I/O modules (slots 0-8) 5. Battery backup (BBU in slot 9) 6. NVRAM module (slot 10) 7. Cage covering the BBU and NVRAM combination module 8. I/O LED at the end of each I/O module handle 9. Location of serial number label/tag

NOTE: For modules containing multiple ports, the bottom port is numbered as zero (0) with numbers increasing going

upward.

I/O module LEDs

Each I/O module ejector handle contains a bi-colored LED. Green indicates normal function, while an amber color indicates a fault condition.

Management module and interfaces

The management module is on the left-most side when facing the back of the system, in slot Mgmt A. The process to remove and add a management module is the same as the I/O modules, however, the management module can only be accommodated in Mgmt A slot.

The management module contains one external LAN connection for management access to the SP module. One micro DB-9 connector is included to provide the console. A USB port is provided for use during service of the system to allow booting from a USB flash device.

DD4200 45

Figure 19. Interfaces on the management module

1 - Ethernet port 2 - USB port 3 - Micro serial port

46 DD4200

I/O modules and slot assignments The table shows the I/O module slot assignments for the systems. See Features on rear of chassis on page 45 for a view of the slot positions on the back panel and Top view of SP module with SP cover removed on page 49 for a top view.

Table 17. DD4200 slot assignments

Slot Number DD4200 DD4200 with Extended Retention Software

DD4200 with DD Cloud Tier

MGMT A Management module Management module Management module

0 Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

1 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

2 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

3 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

4 Ethernet or empty Ethernet or empty Ethernet or empty

5 Ethernet or empty SAS Ethernet or empty

6 Empty SAS SAS

7 SAS SAS SAS

8 SAS SAS SAS

9 BBU BBU BBU

10 NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM

Slot addition rules

A maximum of six optional I/O modules (FC plus Ethernet) are allowed in systems without Extended Retention software, and a maximum of five optional I/O modules (FC plus Ethernet) are allowed in systems with Extended Retention software.

Additional FC modules should be installed in numerically increasing slot numbers immediately to the right of the existing FC modules, or starting in slot 0 if no FC modules were originally installed. A maximum of four FC modules are allowed in a system.

Additional Ethernet modules should be installed in numerically decreasing slot numbers immediately to the left of the existing Ethernet modules or starting in slot 4 if no Ethernet modules were originally installed. For systems without Extended Retention software, a maximum of six (limited to four of any one type) Ethernet modules can be present. For systems with Extended Retention software, a maximum of five (limited to four of any one type) Ethernet modules can be present.

All systems include two SAS modules in slots 7 and 8. Systems with Extended Retention software must have two additional SAS modules in slots 5 and 6.

For systems without Extended Retention software, if adding I/O modules results in the allowed maximum of six I/O modules present, slot 5 is used. Slot 5 is only used for an Ethernet module. Adding FC modules in this specific case require moving an existing Ethernet module to slot 5. Other than this specific case, it is not recommended to move I/O modules between slots.

Adding Extended Retention software to a system includes adding two SAS modules in slots 5 and 6. If the system originally had the maximum of 6 optional I/O modules, the I/O module in slot 5 must be permanently removed from the system.

Fibre Channel (FC) I/O Module Option

An FC I/O module is a dual-port Fibre Channel module. The optional virtual tape library (VTL) feature requires at least one FC I/O module. Boost over Fiber Channel is optional and the total FC HBAs cannot exceed more than allowable Fibre Channel cards per controller.

Ethernet I/O Module Options

The available Ethernet I/O modules are:

Dual Port 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors

DD4200 47

Dual Port 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad Port 1000Base-T Copper with RJ-45 connectors Quad port 2 port 1000Base-T Copper (RJ45) /2 port 1000Base-SR Optical

48 DD4200

Internal system components The photo shows the system with the system processor (SP) module that is removed from the chassis and the SP cover removed.

Figure 20. Top view of SP module with SP cover removed

1 - Front of system 2 - Four groups of 4 DIMM cards

DIMM modules

DD4200 systems contain 16 x 8 GB of memory DIMM.

DD4200 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The Data Domain system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your Data Domain system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your Data Domain system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A Data Domain system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

NOTE:

ES30 SAS shelves must be running DD OS 5.4 or later.

ES30-45 SATA shelves must be running DD OS 5.4 or later.

DD OS 5.7 and later support 4TB drives.

DD4200 49

Table 18. DD4200 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD42003 128 2x4 SAS 30, 45; SATA 15, 30, 455

56 4 192 256

DD4200 ER 3, 4 128 4x4 SAS 30, 45; SATA 15, 30, 455

7 8 384 512

DD4200 w/ DD Cloud Tier

128 3x4 SAS 30, 45; SATA 15, 30, 455

7 8 192 (max), additional 72 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

256 (max), additional 90 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. The maximum shelf count for any specific drive/shelf size might be less than the product of max shelves x max shelves per set.

4. With Extended Retention software.

5. ES30-45 (SATA) is only supported with DD OS 5.4 or later.

6. 5 shelves maximum with ES30, 4 is the recommended maximum.

Types of cabinets and power connections

The ES30 chassis is installed in two types of racks: 40U-C (existing racks) and the 40U-P (newer racks). The racks use one phase or 3-phase power connections.

This section describes the different types of racks and the power connections for the ES30 chassis.

Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

The following illustrations show single phase power connections for 40U-P racks that are used for several Data Domain systems.

50 DD4200

Figure 21. Single phase power connections for the 40U-P expansion rack

DD4200 51

Figure 22. Single phase power connections for the DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200

Single phase power connections for 40U-C (older racks)

The following illustrations show single phase power connections for 40U-C racks that are used for several Data Domain systems.

52 DD4200

Figure 23. Single phase power connections for the Expansion Rack

DD4200 53

Figure 24. Single phase power connections for the DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200

3-Phase power connections for 40U-C (older racks)

The following illustrations show single phase power connections for 40U-C racks that are used for several Data Domain systems.

54 DD4200

Figure 25. Single phase power connections for the Expansion Rack

DD4200 55

Figure 26. Single phase power connections for the DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200

3-Phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks that are used for several Data Domain systems. In those situations, it is desirable to balance the current draw across all three phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration depends on the specific installation. The following illustrations show recommended 3-phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase delta power connections.

56 DD4200

Figure 27. Recommended 3-phase delta power connections for the Expansion Rack

DD4200 57

Figure 28. Recommended 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase wye power connections.

58 DD4200

Figure 29. Recommended 3-phase wye power connections for the Expansion Rack

DD4200 59

Figure 30. 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

60 DD4200

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

ES30 and DD4200 cabling

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of ES20, ES30 SATA, and ES30 SAS shelves to your system. If a system does not follow ALL of these rules it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES20 and ES30 shelves in the same set. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. The maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table cannot be exceeded. You cannot have more than four ES20s in a single set (maximum preference is three). You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum preference is four). You can have a maximum of seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for the metadata shelves for DD Cloud Tier configurations. These

shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

NOTE: An ES20 requires more power than an ES30. Ensure that your rack is configured to handle the power needs.

The tables below show how to configure a mixed system. To use the tables, go to the appropriate system. Then find the number of ES20s that are to be configured in the first column. The next column defines the number of ES20 sets. If there are multiple rows with the same number of ES20s then pick the row with the appropriate number of ES20 SATA shelves. The next column in that row defines the number of sets of ES30 SATA shelves. Finally, there may be entries for the number of desired ES30 SAS shelves and the number of sets to be used.

If the combinations of shelves exceed the supported usable storage, there may not be an entry. The entries are based on the smallest usable storage per shelf type (12TB for ES20, 12 TB for ES30 SATA, and 24TB for ES30 SAS). Always check that the sum of the usable storage of all of the shelves does not exceed the supported usable storage of the configuration.

Table 19. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Minimum appliance shelf count

Maximum appliance shelf count

DD Cloud Tier systems in TB

Extended Retention systems (ER) in TB

Max shelves for ER

4200 (192)

1 16 189 90 for

metadata

DD OS 5.4 and earlier: 576 DD OS 5.5 and later: 385

32

Systems without Extended Retention or DD Cloud Tier all support four chains. The following tables show combinations of ES20 and ES30 shelves. For combinations of any two types of shelves, these tables can be used as a guide.

Table 20. DD4200 cabling information

DD4200

ES20 ES20 chains ES30 SATA ES30 SATA chains ES30 SAS ES30 SAS chains

13-16 4 0 0 0 0

9-12 3 1-5 1 0 0

DD4200 61

Table 20. DD4200 cabling information (continued)

DD4200

9-12 3 0 0 1-3 1

5-8 2 6-10 2 0 0

5-8 2 1-5 1 1-5 1

5-8 2 0 0 5 2

5-8 2 0 0 1-4 1

1-4 1 8-12 3 0 0

1-4 1 6-10 2 1-5 1

1-4 1 1-5 1 1-4 1

1-4 1 1-5 1 5-7 2

1-4 1 0 0 1-4 1

1-4 1 0 0 5-7 2

0 0 13-16 4 0 0

0 0 9-12 3 1-3 1

0 0 5-8 2 1-4 1

0 0 5-8 2 5 2

0 0 1-4 1 1-4 1

0 0 1-4 1 5-7 2

0 0 0 0 1-4 1

0 0 0 0 5-8 2

The following figures show cabling for base systems, systems with the Extended Retention software option, and systems integrated with an Avamar system.

62 DD4200

Figure 31. Recommended DD4200 cabling

DD4200 63

Figure 32. Recommended cabling for DD4200 integrated with Avamar

64 DD4200

Figure 33. Recommended cabling for DD4200 system with extended retention software or DD Cloud Tier

DD4200 65

Figure 34. Recommended cabling for DD4200 with extended retention and integrated with Avamar

DD4200 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The Data Domain system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your Data Domain system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a Data Domain system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O

modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your Data Domain system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A Data Domain system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5.

66 DD4200

DD OS 5.7.1 does not support HA with SATA drives.

Table 21. DD4200 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD4200 128 2x4 SAS 45 1 4 192 240

DD4200 ER 2 128 4x4 SAS 45 2 8 384 480

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. With Extended Retention software.

Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

The following figures show single phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

DD4200 67

Figure 35. Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks used for several Data Domain systems. In those situations it is desirable to balance the current draw across all 3 phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal

68 DD4200

configuration is dependent on the specific installation. The following figures show recommended 3-phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase delta power connections.

Figure 36. 3-phase delta power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)

DD4200 69

Figure 37. 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase wye power connections.

70 DD4200

Figure 38. 3-phase wye power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)

DD4200 71

Figure 39. 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

DS60 and DD4200 cabling

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

72 DD4200

CAUTION: If a system does not follow all these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of usable capacity displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot connect more than two DS60 shelves in a single set.

Table 22. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance shelf count

DD4200 192 TB 1

Mixing DS60, ES30, and ES20 shelves:

The non-Extended Retention versions of these systems all support four chains.

Extra planning and reconfiguration may be required to add DS60 shelves to system with ES20 shelves, ES30 SATA shelves, or a combination of shelves.

The ES20 shelves must be on their own set. Minimize the ES20 set count by combining up to four ES20s per set. ES30 SATA shelves must also be on their own sets. Minimize the ES30 set count by combining up to five ES30s per set. If

required, combine up to seven ES30 SAS shelves per set to minimize the set count. A set can contain a maximum of two DS60 shelves and, if required because of other restrictions, add ES30 SAS shelves up

to a maximum of five shelves in that set.

NOTE: The configuration rules apply also to Extended Retention systems.

The following figures show cabling for base systems and systems with the Extended Retention software.

NOTE: It is recommended that the DS60 shelf with the greater number of drives should always be placed in the bottom

position.

DD4200 73

Figure 40. Recommended cabling for DD4200 (3TB drives)

74 DD4200

Figure 41. Recommended cabling for DD4200 (3TB drives) with Extended Retention Software

DD4200 75

DD4500 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD4500 system features DD4500 system specifications DD4500 storage capacity Front Panel Back Panel I/O modules and slot assignments Internal system components DD4500 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD4500 and DS60 shelf guidelines

4

76 DD4500

DD4500 system features The table summarizes the DD4500 system features.

Table 23. DD4500 system features

Feature DD4500

Rack height 4U, supported in four-post racks only

Rack mounting Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.9 - 76.2 cm).

Power 1 +1 redundant, hot-swappable power units

Processor Two 8-core processors

NVRAM One 4-GB NVRAM module (and companion BBU) for data integrity during a power outage

Fans Hot-swappable, redundant, 5

Memory 8 x 8 GB DIMM + 8 x 16 GB DIMM (192 GB)

Internal drives SSD drives, 3 x 200 GB (base 10)

I/O module slots Nine replaceable I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots, one BBU, one NVRAM, and one Management module slot. See Management module and interfaces on page 45 and I/O modules and slot assignments on page 47.

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 12 x 2-TB or 8 x 3-TB shelves adding up to 285 TB of usable external capacity.

DD Cloud Tier 285 TB of Active Tier capacity, and 570 TB of Cloud Tier capacity. 2 x 4 TB shelves are required to store DD Cloud Tier metadata.

DD Extended Retention 32 shelves adding up to 570 TB of usable external capacity. If lower-capacity 1 TB-drive-based shelves are used, the maximum configuration will also be limited by a maximum shelf count of 40.

DD4500 system specifications

Table 24. DD4500 system specifications

Model Watts BTU/hr Power Weight Width Depth Height

DD4500 800 2730 800 80 lb / 36.3 kg

17.5 in (44.5 cm)

33 in (84 cm) 7 in (17.8 cm)

DD4500 77

Table 25. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

Operating Acoustic Noise Sound power, LWAd: 7.52 bels. Sound pressure, LpAm: 56.4 dB. (Declared noise emission per ISO 9296.)

78 DD4500

DD4500 storage capacity The table lists the capacities of the systems. Data Domain system internal indexes and other product components use variable amounts of storage, depending on the type of data and the sizes of files. If you send different data sets to otherwise identical systems, one system may, over time, have room for more or less actual backup data than another.

Table 26. DD4500 storage capacity

System/ Installed Memory

Internal Disks (SATA SSDs)

Data Storage Space External Storage1

DD4500

(2 SAS I/O modules)

192 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

285 TB Up to a maximum of 12 x 2-TB or 8 x 3-TB shelves.

DD4500 with DD Cloud Tier1

(3 SAS I/O modules)

192 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

285 TB (Active Tier) 96 TB (DD Cloud Tier

metadata) 570 TB (DD Cloud Tier)

Up to a maximum of 12 x 2-TB or 8 x 3-TB shelves.

2x4-TB shelves for DD Cloud Tier metadata.

DD4500 with Extended Retention software1 (4 SAS I/O modules)

192 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

570 TB Up to a maximum of 24 x 2-TB or 16 x 3-TB shelves.

1 The capacity will differ depending on the size of the external storage shelves used. This data based on ES30 shelves.

DD4500 79

Front Panel The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the front of the system.

Figure 42. Front panel components

(1) Filler panel

(2) The red box indicates the system processor (SP) module

(3) SSD drive #1

(4) Fan #0

(5) Power supply #B

(6) AC power disconnect plug

(7) AC power extender module

Power supply units

A system has two power supply units, numbered A and B from the bottom up. Each power supply has its own integral cooling fan. Each power unit has three LEDs (see System LED legend label on page 43) that indicates the following states:

AC LED: Glows green when AC input is good DC LED: Glows green when DC output is good Symbol !: Glows solid or blinking amber for fault or attention

The AC power plugs are located to the right of each power supply. These plugs are pulled to disconnect AC power to each power supply.

AC power extender module

AC power entry is connected at the rear of the system. The AC power extender module provides power to the two power supplies on the front of the system. AC Power plugs are located in the front. The module is adjacent to the SP module and can be removed and replaced.

80 DD4500

Cooling Fans

A system contains five hot-swappable cooling fans in a 4+1 redundant configuration. The fans provide cooling for the processors, DIMMs, IO modules, and the management module. Each fan has a fault LED which causes the fan housing to glow amber. A system can run with one fan faulted or removed.

Solid-state drives

A system contains three hot-swappable 2.5" solid-state drive (SSD) bays that are located in the front and on top of the fan modules. There are four drive bays, with the left-most bay containing a blank. The next drive to the right of the blank is SSD #1, the next is #2, and the right-most bay contains SSD #3. No user backup data is kept on the SSDs.

Each drive has a blue colored power LED and an amber fault LED.

Front LED Indicators

The photo below indicates the location of the four system LEDs.

Figure 43. System LEDs

The next photo shows the location of the system LED legend label. Power supply LEDs on page 82 shows the power supply LEDs. Other front LEDs are shown in Fan and SSD LEDs on page 83. LED states are described in LED status indicators on page 83.

DD4500 81

Figure 44. System LED legend label

The power supply LEDs include:

AC LED on top DC LED in the middle Failure LED on the bottom

Figure 45. Power supply LEDs

Each SSD has two LEDs as shown in the following figure. The lower left corner of the housing around each fan acts as an LED, glowing amber when the fan has failed.

82 DD4500

Figure 46. Fan and SSD LEDs

Table 27. LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

System Dot within a circle (top LED) Blue indicates power on and normal operation.

System, SP fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates failure.

System, chassis fault Exclamation point within a triangle with a light below

Dark indicates normal operation. Yellow indicates a fault condition.

System Marked out hand within a black square (bottom LED)

White warms not to remove the unit.

Power supply AC LED Steady green indicates normal AC power.

Power supply DC LED Steady green indicates normal DC power.

Power supply Failure LED Solid amber indicates a failed power supply.

SSD Top LED Solid blue, disk ready, blinks while busy.

SSD Bottom LED Dark indicates healthy. Solid amber indicates disk fail.

Fan Fan housing The fan housing glows an amber color during fan failure.

DD4500 83

Back Panel The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the back of the system.

Figure 47. Features on rear of chassis

1. Upper level contains all blanks 2. AC power extender module 3. Management module (slot Mgmt A) 4. Red box indicating I/O modules (slots 0-8) 5. Battery backup (BBU in slot 9) 6. NVRAM module (slot 10) 7. Cage covering the BBU and NVRAM combination module 8. I/O LED at the end of each I/O module handle 9. Location of serial number label/tag

NOTE: For modules containing multiple ports, the bottom port is numbered as zero (0) with numbers increasing going

upward.

I/O module LEDs

Each I/O module ejector handle contains a bi-colored LED. Green indicates normal function, while an amber color indicates a fault condition.

Management module and interfaces

The management module is on the left-most side when facing the back of the system, in slot Mgmt A. The process to remove and add a management module is the same as the I/O modules, however, the management module can only be accommodated in Mgmt A slot.

The management module contains one external LAN connection for management access to the SP module. One micro DB-9 connector is included to provide the console. A USB port is provided for use during service of the system to allow booting from a USB flash device.

84 DD4500

Figure 48. Interfaces on the management module

1 - Ethernet port 2 - USB port 3 - Micro serial port

DD4500 85

I/O modules and slot assignments The table shows the I/O module slot assignments for the systems. See Features on rear of chassis on page 45 for a view of the slot positions on the back panel and Top view of SP module with SP cover removed on page 49 for a top view.

Table 28. DD4500 slot assignments

Slot Number DD4500 DD4500 with Extended Retention Software

DD4500 with DD Cloud Tier

MGMT A Management module Management module Management module

0 Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

1 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

2 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

3 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

4 Ethernet or empty Ethernet or empty Ethernet or empty

5 Ethernet or empty SAS Ethernet or empty

6 Empty SAS SAS

7 SAS SAS SAS

8 SAS SAS SAS

9 BBU BBU BBU

10 NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM

Slot addition rules

A maximum of six optional I/O modules (FC plus Ethernet) are allowed in systems without Extended Retention software, and a maximum of five optional I/O modules (FC plus Ethernet) are allowed in systems with Extended Retention software.

Additional FC modules should be installed in numerically increasing slot numbers immediately to the right of the existing FC modules, or starting in slot 0 if no FC modules were originally installed. A maximum of four FC modules are allowed in a system.

Additional Ethernet modules should be installed in numerically decreasing slot numbers immediately to the left of the existing Ethernet modules or starting in slot 4 if no Ethernet modules were originally installed. For systems without Extended Retention software, a maximum of six (limited to four of any one type) Ethernet modules can be present. For systems with Extended Retention software, a maximum of five (limited to four of any one type) Ethernet modules can be present.

All systems include two SAS modules in slots 7 and 8. Systems with Extended Retention software must have two additional SAS modules in slots 5 and 6.

For systems without Extended Retention software, if adding I/O modules results in the allowed maximum of six I/O modules present, slot 5 is used. Slot 5 is only used for an Ethernet module. Adding FC modules in this specific case require moving an existing Ethernet module to slot 5. Other than this specific case, it is not recommended to move I/O modules between slots.

Adding Extended Retention software to a system includes adding two SAS modules in slots 5 and 6. If the system originally had the maximum of 6 optional I/O modules, the I/O module in slot 5 must be permanently removed from the system.

Fibre Channel (FC) I/O Module Option

An FC I/O module is a dual-port Fibre Channel module. The optional virtual tape library (VTL) feature requires at least one FC I/O module. Boost over Fiber Channel is optional and the total FC HBAs cannot exceed more than allowable Fibre Channel cards per controller.

Ethernet I/O Module Options

The available Ethernet I/O modules are:

Dual Port 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors

86 DD4500

Dual Port 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad Port 1000Base-T Copper with RJ-45 connectors Quad port 2 port 1000Base-T Copper (RJ45) /2 port 1000Base-SR Optical

DD4500 87

Internal system components The photo shows the system with the system processor (SP) module that is removed from the chassis and the SP cover removed.

Figure 49. Top view of SP module with SP cover removed

1 - Front of system 2 - Four groups of 4 DIMM cards

DIMM modules

DD4500 systems contain 8 x 8 GB and 8 x 16 GB of memory DIMM. DIMMs must be in specific slots based on DIMM size.

DD4500 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The Data Domain system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your Data Domain system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your Data Domain system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A Data Domain system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

NOTE:

ES30 SAS shelves must be running DD OS 5.4 or later.

ES30-45 SATA shelves must be running DD OS 5.4 or later.

DD OS 5.7 and later support 4TB drives.

88 DD4500

Table 29. DD4500 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD4500 192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 455

56 4 288 384

DD4500 ER 3, 4 192 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 455

7 8 576 768

DD4500 w/ DD Cloud Tier

192 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 455

7 8 288 (max), additional 96 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

384 (max), additional 120 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. The maximum shelf count for any specific drive/shelf size might be less than the product of max shelves x max shelves per set.

4. With Extended Retention software.

5. ES30-45 (SATA) is only supported with DD OS 5.4 or later.

6. 5 shelves maximum with ES30, 4 is the recommended maximum.

Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

The following figures show single phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

DD4500 89

Figure 50. Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

90 DD4500

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

ES30 and DD4500 cabling

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of ES20, ES30 SATA, and ES30 SAS shelves to your system. If a system does not follow ALL of these rules it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES20 and ES30 shelves in the same set. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. The maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table cannot be exceeded. You cannot have more than four ES20s in a single set (maximum preference is three). You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum preference is four). You can have a maximum of seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for the metadata shelves for DD Cloud Tier configurations. These

shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

NOTE: An ES20 requires more power than an ES30. Ensure that your rack is configured to handle the power needs.

The tables below show how to configure a mixed system. To use the tables, go to the appropriate system. Then find the number of ES20s that are to be configured in the first column. The next column defines the number of ES20 sets. If there are multiple rows with the same number of ES20s then pick the row with the appropriate number of ES20 SATA shelves. The next column in that row defines the number of sets of ES30 SATA shelves. Finally, there may be entries for the number of desired ES30 SAS shelves and the number of sets to be used.

If the combinations of shelves exceed the supported usable storage, there may not be an entry. The entries are based on the smallest usable storage per shelf type (12TB for ES20, 12 TB for ES30 SATA, and 24TB for ES30 SAS). Always check that the sum of the usable storage of all of the shelves does not exceed the supported usable storage of the configuration.

Table 30. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Minimum appliance shelf count

Maximum appliance shelf count

DD Cloud Tier systems in TB

Extended Retention systems (ER) in TB

Max shelves for ER

4500 (288)

2 20 285 120 for

metadata

DD OS 5.4 and earlier: 1152 DD OS 5.5 and later: 576

40

Systems without Extended Retention or DD Cloud Tier all support four chains. The following tables show combinations of ES20 and ES30 shelves. For combinations of any two types of shelves, these tables can be used as a guide.

Table 31. DD4500 cabling information

DD4500

ES20 ES20 chains ES30 SATA ES30 SATA chains ES30 SAS ES30 SAS chains

DD4500 91

Table 31. DD4500 cabling information (continued)

DD4500

13-16 4 0 0 0 0

9-12 3 1-5 1 0 0

9-12 3 0 0 1-5 1

5-8 2 1-5 1 1-5 1

5-8 2 6-8 2 0 0

5-8 2 0 0 1-5 1

5-8 2 0 0 6-10 2

1-4 1 9-12 3 0 0

1-4 1 5-8 2 1-5 1

1-4 1 1-4 1 1-5 1

1-4 1 1-4 1 6-10 2

1-4 1 0 0 1-4 1

1-4 1 0 0 5-8 2

1-4 1 0 0 9-11 3

0 0 16-21 4 0 0

0 0 11-15 3 1-5 1

0 0 6-10 2 1-4 1

0 0 6-10 2 5-9 2

0 0 1-5 1 1-4 1

0 0 1-5 1 5-8 2

0 0 1-5 1 9-11 3

0 0 0 0 1-4 1

0 0 0 0 5-8 2

0 0 0 0 9-12 3

The following figures show cabling for base systems, systems with the Extended Retention software option, and systems integrated with an Avamar system.

92 DD4500

Figure 51. Recommended DD4500 cabling

DD4500 93

Figure 52. Recommended cabling for DD4500 integrated with Avamar

94 DD4500

Figure 53. Recommended cabling for DD4500 with extended retention software or DD Cloud Tier

DD4500 95

Figure 54. Recommended cabling for DD4500 with extended retention and integrated with Avamar

DD4500 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The Data Domain system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your Data Domain system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a Data Domain system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O

modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your Data Domain system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A Data Domain system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

96 DD4500

If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5. DD OS 5.7.1 does not support HA with SATA drives.

Table 32. DD4200 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD4500 192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 2 4 288 360

DD4500 ER 2 192 4x4 SAS 45, 60 2 8 576 720

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. With Extended Retention software.

Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

The following figures show single phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

DD4500 97

Figure 55. Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks used for several Data Domain systems. In those situations it is desirable to balance the current draw across all 3 phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal

98 DD4500

configuration is dependent on the specific installation. The following figures show recommended 3-phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase delta power connections.

Figure 56. 3-phase delta power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)

DD4500 99

Figure 57. 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase wye power connections.

100 DD4500

Figure 58. 3-phase wye power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)

DD4500 101

Figure 59. 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

DS60 and DD4500 cabling

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

102 DD4500

CAUTION: If a system does not follow all these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of usable capacity displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot connect more than two DS60 shelves in a single set.

Table 33. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance shelf count

DD4500 288 TB 1

Mixing DS60, ES30, and ES20 shelves:

The non-Extended Retention versions of these systems all support four chains.

Extra planning and reconfiguration may be required to add DS60 shelves to system with ES20 shelves, ES30 SATA shelves, or a combination of shelves.

The ES20 shelves must be on their own set. Minimize the ES20 set count by combining up to four ES20s per set. ES30 SATA shelves must also be on their own sets. Minimize the ES30 set count by combining up to five ES30s per set. If

required, combine up to seven ES30 SAS shelves per set to minimize the set count. A set can contain a maximum of two DS60 shelves and, if required because of other restrictions, add ES30 SAS shelves up

to a maximum of five shelves in that set.

NOTE: The configuration rules apply also to Extended Retention systems.

The following figures show cabling for base systems and systems with the Extended Retention software.

NOTE: It is recommended that the DS60 shelf with the greater number of drives should always be placed in the bottom

position.

DD4500 103

Figure 60. Recommended cabling for DD4500 (3TB drives)

104 DD4500

Figure 61. Recommended cabling for DD4500 (3TB drives) with Extended Retention software

DD4500 105

Figure 62. Recommended cabling for DD4500 with DD Cloud Tier

106 DD4500

Figure 63. Recommended cabling for DD4500 (4TB drives)

DD4500 107

Figure 64. Recommended cabling for DD4500 (4TB drives) with Extended Retention software

108 DD4500

DD6300 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD6300 system features DD6300 system specifications DD6300 storage capacity DD6300 front panel Back panel I/O modules Internal system components DD6300 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD6300 and DS60 shelf guidelines

DD6300 system features Table 34. DD6300 system features

Feature Base configuration Expanded configuration

Rack height 2U 2U

Processor E5-2620 V3 E5-2620 V3

Kernel 3.2.x 3.2.x

NVRAM NVRAM 8g Model 3 NVRAM 8g Model 3

Memory 6 x 8 GB DIMM (48 GB) 12 x 8 GB DIMM (96 GB)

Internal drives HDDs in 3.5" bays 7/ 7+5 12

SSDs in 3.5" bays 0 0

SSDs in 2.5" bays 1 2

I/O module slots SAS I/O modules (Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS)

0 for internal storage only

1 with external storage

0 for internal storage only

1 with external storage

Network and FC I/O modules Four replaceable I/O module slots. Not hot- swappable.

Four replaceable I/O module slots. Not hot- swappable.

Supported capacity 76 TB (28 TB internal + 48 TB external)

180 TB (36 TB internal + 144 TB external)

High availability support No No

HA private interconnect N/A N/A

External SSD shelf N/A N/A

SAS string depth (max) ES30 1 4

DS60 0 1

Stream count 270 writes, 75 reads 270 writes, 75 reads

5

DD6300 109

DD6300 system specifications Table 35. DD6300 system specifications

Average power consumption 25 C

Heat dissipation (operating maximum)

Weight a Width Depth Height

530W 1.69 x 106 J/hr (1604 Btu/hr) maximum

80 lbs (36.29 kg) 17.50 in (44.45 cm)

30.5 in (77.5 cm) 3.40 in (8.64 cm)

a. The weight does not include mounting rails. Allow 2.3-4.5 kg (5-10 lb) for a rail set.

Table 36. System operating environment

Requirement Description

Ambient temperature 10C - 35C; derate 1.1C per 1,000 ft (304 m)

Relative humidity (extremes) 2080% noncondensing

Elevation 0 - 7,500ft (0 - 2,268m)

Operating acoustic noise Lwad sound power, 7.5 Bels

DD6300 storage capacity

The following table provides storage capacity information for the DD6300 system.

Table 37. DD6300 storage capacity

Memory Internal disks

Internal storage (raw)

External storage (raw)

Usable data storage space (TB/TiB/GB/GiB)a

48 GB (Factory base)

Front: 7 x 4 TB

Rear: 1 x 800 GB SSD

28 TB 60 TB Internal: 14 TB

External: 48 TB

Internal: 12.74 TiB

External: 43.68 TiB

Internal: 14,000 GB

External: 48,000 GB

Internal: 13,039 GiB

External: 44,704 GiB

48 GB (Factory upgrade)

12 x 4 TB HDD

Rear: 1 x 800 GB SSD

48 TB 60 TB Internal: 34 TB

External: 48 TB

Internal: 30.94 TiB

External: 43.68 TiB

Internal: 34,000 GB

External: 48,000 GB

Internal: 31,665 GiB

External: 44,704 GiB

48 GB (Field Upgrade)

(7 + 5) x 4 TB HDD

Rear: 1 x 800 GB SSD

48 TB 60 TB Internal: 22 TB

External: 48 TB

Internal: 20.02 TiB

External: 43.68 TiB

Internal: 22,000 GB

External: 48,000 GB

Internal: 20,489 GiB

External: 44,704 GiB

96 GB (Expanded)

Front: 12 x 4 TB HDDs

Rear: 2 x 800 GB SSD

48 TB 180 TB Internal: 34 TB

External: 144 TB

Internal: 30.94 TiB

External: 131 TiB

Internal: 34,000 GB

External: 144,000 GB

Internal: 31,665 GiB

External: 134,110 GiB

96 GB (Field upgrade

Front: (7 + 5) x 4 TB HDDs

48 TB 180 TB Internal: 22 TB

External: 144 TB

Internal: 20.02 TiB

External: 131 TiB

Internal: 22,000 GB

External: 144,000 GB

Internal: 20,489 GiB

External: 134,110 GiB

110 DD6300

Table 37. DD6300 storage capacity (continued)

Memory Internal disks

Internal storage (raw)

External storage (raw)

Usable data storage space (TB/TiB/GB/GiB)a

from 48 GB)

Rear: 2 x 800 GB SSD

a. The capacity differs depending on the size of the external storage shelves used. This data based on ES30 shelves.

DD6300 front panel

DD6300 All-in-One (AIO) systems have one of the following front panel drive configurations to host the DD OS boot drives, and provide storage for customer data:

NOTE: Upgrading a base configuration to an expanded configuration provides less capacity than a factory-built expanded

configuration.

Table 38. DD6300 AIO capacity

Configuration Installed drives Usable internal capacity

DD6300 base configuration Seven 4 TB HDDs 14 TB

DD6300 expanded configuration (factory)

Twelve 4 TB HDDs 34 TB

DD6300 expanded configuration (upgrade)

Seven 4 TB HDDs + Five 4 TB HDDs 22 TB

Table 39. DD6300 AIO configuration

Slot 0: HDD 1 Slot 1: HDD 2 Slot 2: HDD 3 Slot 3: HDD 4

Slot 4: HDD 5 Slot 5: HDD 6 Slot 6: HDD 7 Slot 7: Filler

Slot 8: Filler Slot 9: Filler Slot 10: Filler Slot 11: Filler

Table 40. DD6300 AIO expanded configuration

Slot 0: HDD 1 Slot 1: HDD 2 Slot 2: HDD 3 Slot 3: HDD 4

Slot 4: HDD 5 Slot 5: HDD 6 Slot 6: HDD 7 Slot 7: HDD 8

Slot 8: HDD 9 Slot 9: HDD 10 Slot 10: HDD 11 Slot 11: HDD 12

Front LED indicators

The front of the system contain 12 disk drive status LEDs that are normally blue, and blink when there is activity on the disk. The LEDs are shaped like triangles, and the apex of the triangle points left or right, indicating that disk's status. If the disk drive has a failure, the disks status LED turns from blue to amber, indicating that a drive must be replaced.

The front also contains two system status LEDs. A blue system power LED is present that is on whenever the system has power. An amber system fault LED is also present that is normally off and lit amber whenever the chassis or any other FRU in the system requires service.

DD6300 111

Figure 65. Front LED indicators

1. System service LED 2. Drive activity/service LED 3. System power LED

Table 41. Front LEDs

Name Color Purpose

System power LED Blue Indication that the system has power.

System service LED Amber Normally off; is lit amber whenever the SP or any other FRU (except disk drives) in the system requires service.

Drive activity/Service LED Blue /Amber Lit blue when the drive is powered. Blinks blue during drive activity. Lit solid amber when a disk needs

service.

112 DD6300

Back panel The back panel of the chassis contains the following components:

1. Management panel 2. Two 2.5" SSD slots labeled 0 and 1

3. I/O module slots 4. Power supply modules (PSU 0 is the lower module, and PSU 1 is the upper module)

DD6300 rear SSDs

The D6300 system uses one or two 800 GB SSDs mounted at the rear of the chassis for metadata caching:

Table 42. DD6300 rear SSDs

Configuration Number of SSDs SSD location

DD6300 1 SSD slot 0

DD6300 expanded 2 SSD slots 0 and 1

NOTE: SSDs are not RAID-protected.

Rear LED indicators

Figure 66. Rear LED indicators

1. Do not remove LED 2. SP service LED 3. System power LED 4. AC power good LED 5. DC power good LED 6. Power supply fault LED

Name of LED Location Color Definition

"Do not remove" LED Upper left-most part of rear chassis

White This LED is lit during system BIOS and BMC firmware updates and indicates that the SP should not be removed from the chassis, nor should system power be removed.

DD6300 113

Name of LED Location Color Definition

SP service LED To the right of "Do not remove" LED

Amber Solid amber - SP or a FRU inside the SP requires service

Blinking amber - blink rate reflects one of the following is booting BIOS - 1/4 Hz POST - 1 Hz OS - 4 Hz

Drive Power/Activity LED a Left LED on the SSD Blue Lit blue when the drive is powered. Blinks during drive activity.

Drive Fault LED a Right LED on the SSD Amber Lit solid amber when a drive needs service.

System power LED Right-most LED on the management panel

Blue SP has good, stable power

PSU FRU LED - AC Good Top LED on power supply Green AC input is as expected

PSU FRU LED - DC Good Middle LED on power supply Green DC output is as expected

PSU FRU LED - Attention Bottom LED on power supply Amber PSU has encountered a fault condition

a. The SSD is only present on DD6300 systems.

114 DD6300

Figure 67. I/O module Power/Service LED location

1. I/O module power/service LED

Table 43. I/O LEDs

Name of LED Location Color Definition

I/O module FRU LED - I/O module Power/Service LED location on page 115

Ejector handle of I/O modules Green/Amber Green - I/O module has power and is functioning normally

Amber - I/O module has encountered a fault condition and requires service

I/O port status LED (SAS, Fibre Channel, and optical networking I/O modules only)

One LED per I/O module port Blue Lit when port is enabled. May flash if SW "marks" the port. a

a. For RJ45 networking ports, the standard green link and amber activity LEDs are used.

DD6300 115

Figure 68. Onboard network port LEDs

1. Network port link LED 2. Network port activity LED 3. Dedicated IPMI port BMC0A 4. Management interface EthMa

Table 44. Onboard network port LEDs

Name of LED Location Color Definition

Onboard network port LED - Link LED Onboard network port LEDs on page 116

Top LED on network port Green Lit when there is a link at 1000BaseT and 100BaseT speeds

Off when the link speed is 10BaseT or there is no link

Onboard network port LED - Activity LED

Bottom LED on network port Amber Blinks when there is traffic on the port

I/O modules

I/O module slot numbering

The eight I/O module slots are enumerated as Slot 0 (on the left when viewed from the rear) through Slot 7. Ports on an I/O module are enumerated as 0 through 3, with 0 being on the bottom.

Figure 69. I/O module slot numbering

1. Slot 0 2. Slot 1 3. Slot 2 4. Slot 3 5. Slot 4 6. Slot 5 7. Slot 6 8. Slot 7

I/O modules are only supported in fixed configurations. The fixed configurations define the exact slots into which the I/O modules may be inserted. The processors directly drive the eight I/O module slots, meaning all slots are full performance.

116 DD6300

The non-optional SAS, NVRAM, and 10GBaseT I/O modules are allocated to fixed slots. The optional Host Interface I/O modules are used for front end networking and Fibre Channel connections. The quantity and type of these I/O modules is customizable, and there are many valid configurations.

slot map

Slot 0, Slot 1, Slot 2 (except when it is marked "Reserved") are populated with the required I/O modules and are not optional. I/O module slots 3-7 contain optional Host Interface I/O modules and can contain specific I/O modules or no I/O modules at all.

Table 45. I/O slot module mapping

Tier Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7

AIO Expanded NVRAM 8g Model 3

Quad Port 10 GBase- T

Reserved (Optional) Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

(Optional) Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

(Optional) Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

(Optional) Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

(Optional) Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS a

AIO NVRAM 8g Model 3

Quad Port 10 GBase- T

Reserved Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 6 Gbps SASa

a. Optional in configurations, but required with one or more external storage shelves.

I/O module population rules

The system chassis has eight slots for I/O modules. Slots 0, 1, 2, and 7 are reserved. Slots 3, 4, 5, and 6 support host interface I/O modules. The maximum supported number of any type of host interface I/O module is four.

NOTE: A maximum of three Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules are supported in slots 3-6 because of the mandatory Quad

Port 10 GBase-T I/O module in slot 1.

The following table assigns rules for populating the I/O modules.

Table 46. I/O module slot population rules

Step I/O module name Slots Notes

Step 1: Populate mandatory I/O modules

NVRAM 8g Model 3 0 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 10 GBase-T 1 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS 2 Reserved for expanded configuration.

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS 7 Reserved for for base configuration.

Step 2: Populate all Quad Port 10GbE SR I/O modules

Quad Port 10GbE SR 3, 4, 5, 6 Populate starting from the lowest available slot number.

Step 3: Populate all Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules

Quad Port 10 GBase-T 3, 4, 5, 6 Populate starting from the lowest available slot number. With Quad Port 10 GBase-T

DD6300 117

Table 46. I/O module slot population rules (continued)

Step I/O module name Slots Notes

in slot 1, max number of Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules are limited to 4.

Step 4: Populate all Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel I/O modules

Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

6, 5, 4, 3 Populate starting from the highest available slot number.

118 DD6300

Internal system components The following figure shows the layout of the CPUs and DIMMs inside the chassis. The front of the system is at the top of the figure.

Figure 70. CPU and memory locations

DIMMs overview

Dual in-line memory modules (DIMM) come in various sizes, which must be configured in a certain way. This topic can help you select the correct configuration when servicing DIMMs.

The storage processor contains two Intel processors each with an integrated memory controller that supports four channels of memory. The storage processor allows two DIMM slots per channel, so the storage processor supports a total of 16 DIMM slots.

DD6300 memory DIMM configuration

Table 47. DD6300 memory DIMM configuration

Tier Total Memory Memory DIMM Configuration

AIO Expanded 96 GB 12 x 8 GB

AIO 48 GB 6 x 8 GB

To ensure maximum memory performance, there are memory DIMM population rules for best memory loading and interleaving. Memory locations - CPU 0 on page 119 and Memory locations - CPU 1 on page 119 specify the DIMM location rules for various memory configurations:

Table 48. Memory locations - CPU 0

Channel A Channel B Channel D Channel C

Tier Total Memory

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

AIO Expanded 96 GB 8 GB N/A 8 GB N/A 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB

AIO 48 GB N/A N/A 8 GB N/A N/A 8 GB N/A 8 GB

Table 49. Memory locations - CPU 1

Channel A Channel B Channel D Channel C

Tier Total Memory

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

AIO Expanded 96 GB 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB 8 GB N/A 8 GB N/A 8 GB

AIO 48 GB 8 GB N/A 8 GB N/A N/A 8 GB N/A N/A

DD6300 119

DD6300 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

Table 50. DD6300 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD6300 48 1x4 (Optional)

SAS 30, 45, 60

1 1 48 60

DD6300 w/ Expanded Capacity 3

96 1x4 (Optional)

SAS 30, 45, 60

5 1 144 180

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. DDOS 6.0 and FS15 SSD shelf configuration

Types of cabinets and power connections

The ES30 chassis is installed in two types of racks: 40U-C (existing racks) and the 40U-P (newer racks). The racks use one phase or 3-phase power connections.

3-Phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks that are used for several systems. In those situations, it is desirable to balance the current draw across all three phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration depends on the specific installation.

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

120 DD6300

DD6300, DD6800, and DD9300 shelf configurations

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

CAUTION: If a system does not follow ALL of these rules it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the cabling table for each system. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier

configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 51. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Appliance Minimum appliance shelf count*

Max appliance shelf count

48 TB usable 0 1

w/ Expansion 144 TB usable 1 5

144 TB usable 2 28

w/ Expansion 288 TB usable 2 28

w/ High Availability (HA) 288 TB usable 2 28

w/ Extended Retention (ER) 576 TB usable 2 28

w/ Cloud Tier 288 TB usable (96 TB for Cloud Tier)

2 28

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 288 TB usable (96 TB for Cloud Tier)

2 28

384 TB usable 3 28

w/ Expansion 720 TB usable 3 28

w/ HA 720 TB usable 3 28

w/ ER 1440 TB usable 7 28

w/ Cloud Tier 720 TB usable (192 TB for Cloud Tier)

7 28

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 720 TB usable (192 TB for Cloud Tier)

7 28

* The minimum appliance shelf count does not include shelves for Cloud Tier.

DD6300 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5.

DD6300 121

Table 52. DD6300 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD6300 2 48 3 1x4 4 N/A 0 0 48 60

DD6300 w/ Expanded Capacity 2

96 1x4 4 SAS 45, 60 5 1 1 144 180

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. Only available with DD OS 6.x and greater.

3. Base configuration does not support DS60 additional capacity; must have memory configuration of 96GB.

4. One SAS card is optional and must be ordered with external SAS shelf order. Duel paths from this single SAS card to external shelves are required.

5. The DS60 will have a maximum of 45 4Tb drives.

shelf configurations

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

CAUTION: If a system does not follow all these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot connect more than three DS60 shelves in a single set.

Table 53. Minimum configurations

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance DS60 shelf count

144 TB 0

144 TB 2

w/ High Availability (HA) 288 TB 2 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache)

w/ Extended Retention (ER) 576 TB 2

w/ Cloud Tier 384 TB (96 TB for Cloud Tier) 2 (plus 2 ES30s for Cloud Tier)

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 384 TB (96 TB for Cloud Tier) 2 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache, and 2 ES30s for Cloud Tier)

384 TB 3

w/ HA 720 TB 3 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache)

w/ ER 1440 TB 3

w/ Cloud Tier 912 TB (192 TB for Cloud Tier) 3 (plus 4 ES30s or 1 DS60 for Cloud Tier)

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 912 TB (192 TB for Cloud Tier) 4 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache, and 4 ES30s or 1 DS60 for Cloud Tier)

1. DS60 will only be partially filled.

A Cloud Tier system shares the ERSO cabling configuration; however, Cloud Tier has a lower maximum. It is recommended that the shelf with the greater number of drives should always be placed in the bottom position. only supports one DS60. only has one SAS SLIC and all DS60 connections are made to that single SAS SLIC.

122 DD6300

only has one SAS SLIC and all DS60 connections are made to that single SAS SLIC.

DD6300 123

DD6800 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD6800 system features DD6800 system specifications DD6800 storage capacity DD6800 front panel Back panel I/O modules Internal system components DD6800 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD6800 and DS60 shelf guidelines

DD6800 system features Table 54. DD6800 system features

Feature Base configuration Expanded configuration

Rack height 2U 2U

Processor E5-2630 V3 E5-2630 V3

Kernel 3.2.x 3.2.x

NVRAM NVRAM 8g Model 3 NVRAM 8g Model 3

Memory 8 x 8 GB DIMM + 8 x 16 GB DIMM (192 GB)

8 x 8 GB DIMM + 8 x 16 GB DIMM (192 GB)

Internal drives HDDs in 3.5" bays 7/ 7+5 12

SSDs in 3.5" bays 0 0

SSDs in 2.5" bays 1 2

I/O module slots SAS I/O modules (Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS)

2 2

Network and FC I/O modules Four replaceable I/O module slots. Not hot- swappable.

Four replaceable I/O module slots. Not hot- swappable.

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 144 TB 288 TB

DD Cloud Tier N/A 576 TB a

Extended retention N/A 288 TBb

High availability support Yes Yes

HA private interconnect (2) 10GBase-T ports (2) 10GBase-T ports

External SSD shelf One SSD shelf for A-P high availability cluster containing two drives.

One SSD shelf for A-P high availability cluster containing four drives.

SAS string depth (max) ES30 1 4

6

124 DD6800

Table 54. DD6800 system features (continued)

Feature Base configuration Expanded configuration

DS60 0 1

ES30 and DS60 5 shelves total 5 shelves total

Stream count 405 writes, 112 reads 405 writes, 112 reads

a. DD Cloud Tier requires two ES30 shelves fully populated with 4 TB drives to store DD Cloud Tier metadata. b. Extended retention not available on HA configurations

DD6800 system specifications Table 55. DD6800 system specifications

Average power consumption 25 C

Heat dissipation (operating maximum)

Weight a Width Depth Height

560W 1.69 x 106 J/hr (1604 Btu/hr) maximum

68 lbs (30.84 kg) 17.50 in (44.45 cm)

30.5 in (77.5 cm) 3.40 in (8.64 cm)

a. The weight does not include mounting rails. Allow 2.3-4.5 kg (5-10 lb) for a rail set.

Table 56. System operating environment

Requirement Description

Ambient temperature 10C - 35C; derate 1.1C per 1,000 ft (304 m)

Relative humidity (extremes) 2080% noncondensing

Elevation 0 - 7,500ft (0 - 2,268m)

Operating acoustic noise Lwad sound power, 7.5 Bels

DD6800 storage capacity

The following table provides storage capacity information for the DD6800 system.

Table 57. DD6800 storage capacity

Memory Internal disks (system disks only)

External storage (raw)

Usable data storage space (TB/TiB/GB/GiB)a

192 GB (Base) 4 x 4 TB HDD

2 x 800 GB SSD

180 TBb 144 TB 131 TiB 144,000 GB 134,110 GiB

192 GB (Expanded)

4 x 4 TB HDD

4 x 800 GB SSD

Active Tier: 360 TBb

Archive Tier: 360 TBc

Cloud Tier: 720 TB in the cloudd

Cloud Tier metadata: 120 TB

Active Tier: 288 TB

Archive Tier: 288 TB

Cloud Tier: 576 TB

Cloud Tier metadata: 96 TB

Active Tier: 261.9 TiB

Archive Tier: 261.9 TiB

Cloud Tier: 523.8 TiB

Cloud Tier metadata: 87.3 TiB

Active Tier: 288,000 GB

Archive Tier: 288,000 GB

Cloud Tier: 576,000 GB

Cloud Tier metadata: 96,000 GB

Active Tier: 268,221 GiB

Archive Tier: 268,221 GiB

Cloud Tier: 536,442 GiB

Cloud Tier metadata: 89,407 GiB

DD6800 125

Table 57. DD6800 storage capacity (continued)

Memory Internal disks (system disks only)

External storage (raw)

Usable data storage space (TB/TiB/GB/GiB)a

local storage

a. The capacity differs depending on the size of the external storage shelves used. This data based on ES30 shelves. b. HA is supported. c. HA is not supported with Extended Retention. d. HA is supported in combination with Cloud Tier.

DD6800 front panel

DD6800 Dataless Head (DLH) systems have one of the following front panel drive configurations to host the DD OS boot drives and provide metadata caching on SSD:

Table 58. DD6800 DLH SSD requirements

Configuration Number of SSDs

DD6800 2

DD6800 expanded 4

NOTE: SSDs are not RAID-protected.

Table 59. DD6800 DLH configuration drive layout

Slot 0: HDD 1 Slot 1: HDD 2 Slot 2: HDD 3 Slot 3: HDD 4

Slot 4: SSD 1 Slot 5: SSD 2 Slot 6: Filler Slot 7: Filler

Slot 8: Filler Slot 9: Filler Slot 10: Filler Slot 11: Filler

Table 60. DD6800 DLH expanded configuration drive layout

Slot 0: HDD 1 Slot 1: HDD 2 Slot 2: HDD 3 Slot 3: HDD 4

Slot 4: SSD 1 Slot 5: SSD 2 Slot 6: SSD 3 Slot 7: SSD 4

Slot 8: Filler Slot 9: Filler Slot 10: Filler Slot 11: Filler

Front LED indicators

The front of the system contain 12 disk drive status LEDs that are normally blue, and blink when there is activity on the disk. The LEDs are shaped like triangles, and the apex of the triangle points left or right, indicating that disk's status. If the disk drive has a failure, the disks status LED turns from blue to amber, indicating that a drive must be replaced.

The front also contains two system status LEDs. A blue system power LED is present that is on whenever the system has power. An amber system fault LED is also present that is normally off and lit amber whenever the chassis or any other FRU in the system requires service.

Figure 71. Front LED indicators

126 DD6800

1. System service LED 2. Drive activity/service LED 3. System power LED

Table 61. Front LEDs

Name Color Purpose

System power LED Blue Indication that the system has power.

System service LED Amber Normally off; is lit amber whenever the SP or any other FRU (except disk drives) in the system requires service.

Drive activity/Service LED Blue /Amber Lit blue when the drive is powered. Blinks blue during drive activity. Lit solid amber when a disk needs

service.

DD6800 127

Back panel The back panel of the chassis contains the following components:

1. Management panel 2. Not Used -- Two 2.5" SSD slots labeled 0 and 1

3. I/O module slots 4. Power supply modules (PSU 0 is the lower module, and PSU 1 is the upper module)

Rear LED indicators

Figure 72. Rear LED indicators

1. Do not remove LED 2. SP service LED 3. System power LED 4. AC power good LED 5. DC power good LED 6. Power supply fault LED

Name of LED Location Color Definition

"Do not remove" LED Upper left-most part of rear chassis

White This LED is lit during system BIOS and BMC firmware updates and indicates that the SP should not be removed from the chassis, nor should system power be removed.

SP service LED To the right of "Do not remove" LED

Amber Solid amber - SP or a FRU inside the SP requires service

Blinking amber - blink rate reflects one of the following is booting BIOS - 1/4 Hz POST - 1 Hz OS - 4 Hz

Drive Power/Activity LED a Left LED on the SSD Blue Lit blue when the drive is powered. Blinks during drive activity.

128 DD6800

Name of LED Location Color Definition

Drive Fault LED a Right LED on the SSD Amber Lit solid amber when a drive needs service.

System power LED Right-most LED on the management panel

Blue SP has good, stable power

PSU FRU LED - AC Good Top LED on power supply Green AC input is as expected

PSU FRU LED - DC Good Middle LED on power supply Green DC output is as expected

PSU FRU LED - Attention Bottom LED on power supply Amber PSU has encountered a fault condition

a. The SSD is only present on DD6300 systems.

Figure 73. I/O module Power/Service LED location

1. I/O module power/service LED

Table 62. I/O LEDs

Name of LED Location Color Definition

I/O module FRU LED - I/O module Power/Service LED location on page 129

Ejector handle of I/O modules Green/Amber Green - I/O module has power and is functioning normally

Amber - I/O module has encountered a fault condition and requires service

DD6800 129

Table 62. I/O LEDs (continued)

Name of LED Location Color Definition

I/O port status LED (SAS, Fibre Channel, and optical networking I/O modules only)

One LED per I/O module port Blue Lit when port is enabled. May flash if SW "marks" the port. a

a. For RJ45 networking ports, the standard green link and amber activity LEDs are used.

Figure 74. Onboard network port LEDs

1. Network port link LED 2. Network port activity LED 3. Dedicated IPMI port BMC0A 4. Management interface EthMa

Table 63. Onboard network port LEDs

Name of LED Location Color Definition

Onboard network port LED - Link LED Onboard network port LEDs on page 130

Top LED on network port Green Lit when there is a link at 1000BaseT and 100BaseT speeds

Off when the link speed is 10BaseT or there is no link

Onboard network port LED - Activity LED

Bottom LED on network port Amber Blinks when there is traffic on the port

I/O modules

I/O module slot numbering

The eight I/O module slots are enumerated as Slot 0 (on the left when viewed from the rear) through Slot 7. Ports on an I/O module are enumerated as 0 through 3, with 0 being on the bottom.

Figure 75. I/O module slot numbering

1. Slot 0 2. Slot 1 3. Slot 2

130 DD6800

4. Slot 3 5. Slot 4 6. Slot 5 7. Slot 6 8. Slot 7

I/O modules are only supported in fixed configurations. The fixed configurations define the exact slots into which the I/O modules may be inserted. The processors directly drive the eight I/O module slots, meaning all slots are full performance.

The non-optional SAS, NVRAM, and 10GBaseT I/O modules are allocated to fixed slots. The optional Host Interface I/O modules are used for front end networking and Fibre Channel connections. The quantity and type of these I/O modules is customizable, and there are many valid configurations.

slot map

I/O module slots 36 contain optional Host Interface I/O modules and can contain specific I/O modules or no I/O modules at all. Slot 0, Slot 1, Slot 2, and Slot 7 are populated with the required I/O modules and are not optional.

Table 64. I/O module slot mapping

Tier Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7

DLH NVRAM 8g Model 3

Quad Port 10 GBase-T

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

DLH Extended Retention/DD Cloud Tier

DLH High Availability

NVRAM 8g Model 3

Quad Port 10 GBase-T for HA interconn ect

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

I/O module population rules

The system chassis has eight slots for I/O modules. Slots 0, 1, 2, and 7 are reserved. Slots 3, 4, 5, and 6 support host interface I/O modules. The maximum supported number of any type of host interface I/O module is four.

NOTE: A maximum of three Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules are supported in slots 3-6 because of the mandatory Quad

Port 10 GBase-T I/O module in slot 1.

The following table assigns rules for populating the I/O modules.

Table 65. I/O module slot population rules

Step I/O module name Slots Notes

Step 1: Populate mandatory I/O modules

NVRAM 8g Model 3 0 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 10 GBase-T 1 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS 2 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS 7 Mandatory for all configurations

DD6800 131

Table 65. I/O module slot population rules (continued)

Step I/O module name Slots Notes

Step 2: Populate all Quad Port 10GbE SR I/O modules

Quad Port 10GbE SR 3, 4, 5, 6 Populate starting from the lowest available slot number.

Step 3: Populate all Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules

Quad Port 10 GBase-T 3, 4, 5, 6 Populate starting from the lowest available slot number. With Quad Port 10 GBase-T in slot 1, max number of Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules are limited to 4.

Step 4: Populate all Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel I/O modules

Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

6, 5, 4, 3 Populate starting from the highest available slot number.

132 DD6800

Internal system components The following figure shows the layout of the CPUs and DIMMs inside the chassis. The front of the system is at the top of the figure.

Figure 76. CPU and memory locations

DIMMs overview

Dual in-line memory modules (DIMM) come in various sizes, which must be configured in a certain way. This topic can help you select the correct configuration when servicing DIMMs.

The storage processor contains two Intel processors each with an integrated memory controller that supports four channels of memory. The storage processor allows two DIMM slots per channel, so the storage processor supports a total of 16 DIMM slots.

memory DIMM configuration

Table 66. memory DIMM configuration

Tier Total Memory Memory DIMM Configuration

DLH 192 GB 8 x 16 GB +8 x 8 GB

DLH Extended Retention/DD Cloud Tier 192 GB 8 x 16 GB +8 x 8 GB

HA is supported with all available memory configurations.

To ensure maximum memory performance, there are memory DIMM population rules for best memory loading and interleaving. Memory locations - CPU 0 on page 133 and Memory locations - CPU 1 on page 133 specify the DIMM location rules for various memory configurations:

Table 67. Memory locations - CPU 0

Channel A Channel B Channel D Channel C

Tier Total Memory

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DLH (Base) 192 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB

DLH (Expanded)

192 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB

Table 68. Memory locations - CPU 1

Channel A Channel B Channel D Channel C

Tier Total Memory

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DLH (Base) 192 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB

DD6800 133

Table 68. Memory locations - CPU 1 (continued)

DLH (Expanded)

192 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB

DD6800 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. DD6800 systems support ES30 SATA shelves after controller upgrades from older models. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

Table 69. DD6800 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD6800 w/ HA 192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 144 180

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity 4

192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 288 360

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity w/ HA 6

192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

7 3 4 288 360

DD6800 w/ ER 192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 576 720

DD6800 w/ DD Cloud Tier

192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 288 (max), additional 96 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

360 (max), additional 120 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

DD6800 w/ HA and DD Cloud Tier 4

192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

7 3 4 288 (max), additional 96 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

360 (max), additional 120 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. Recommended configurations start at four shelves per set and expand beyond that as required. For HA configurations, the FS15 counts as a shelf.

4. DDOS 6.x and later and FS15 SSD shelf configuration

134 DD6800

Types of cabinets and power connections

The ES30 chassis is installed in two types of racks: 40U-C (existing racks) and the 40U-P (newer racks). The racks use one phase or 3-phase power connections.

3-Phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks that are used for several systems. In those situations, it is desirable to balance the current draw across all three phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration depends on the specific installation.

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

DD6300, DD6800, and DD9300 shelf configurations

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

CAUTION: If a system does not follow ALL of these rules it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the cabling table for each system. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier

configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 70. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Appliance Minimum appliance shelf count*

Max appliance shelf count

48 TB usable 0 1

w/ Expansion 144 TB usable 1 5

144 TB usable 2 28

w/ Expansion 288 TB usable 2 28

w/ High Availability (HA) 288 TB usable 2 28

w/ Extended Retention (ER) 576 TB usable 2 28

w/ Cloud Tier 288 TB usable (96 TB for Cloud Tier)

2 28

DD6800 135

Table 70. Minimum and maximum configurations (continued)

System Appliance Minimum appliance shelf count*

Max appliance shelf count

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 288 TB usable (96 TB for Cloud Tier)

2 28

384 TB usable 3 28

w/ Expansion 720 TB usable 3 28

w/ HA 720 TB usable 3 28

w/ ER 1440 TB usable 7 28

w/ Cloud Tier 720 TB usable (192 TB for Cloud Tier)

7 28

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 720 TB usable (192 TB for Cloud Tier)

7 28

* The minimum appliance shelf count does not include shelves for Cloud Tier.

DD6800 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5.

Table 71. DD6800 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD6800 2, 3, 4 192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 1 1 144 180

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity 2, 3

192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 1 2 288 360

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ HA 2, 3

192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 1 2 288 360

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ ER 2, 3

192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 2 4 576 720

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ Cloud Tier 3,

5

192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 2 4 288 + 96 for DD Cloud Tier

360 + 120 for DD Cloud Tier

DD6800 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ Cloud Tier and HA 3, 5

192 2x4 SAS 45, 60 2 4 288 + 96 for DD Cloud Tier

360 + 120 for DD Cloud Tier

136 DD6800

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. With DD OS 6.x (or greater) & SSD.

3. Only available with DD OS 6.x and greater.

4.DD6800 base configuration has the same configuration as the DD6800 Expanded. Maximum capacity is limited by capacity license.

5. With Cloud Tier Storage.

shelf configurations

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

CAUTION: If a system does not follow all these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot connect more than three DS60 shelves in a single set.

Table 72. Minimum configurations

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance DS60 shelf count

144 TB 0

144 TB 2

w/ High Availability (HA) 288 TB 2 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache)

w/ Extended Retention (ER) 576 TB 2

w/ Cloud Tier 384 TB (96 TB for Cloud Tier) 2 (plus 2 ES30s for Cloud Tier)

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 384 TB (96 TB for Cloud Tier) 2 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache, and 2 ES30s for Cloud Tier)

384 TB 3

w/ HA 720 TB 3 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache)

w/ ER 1440 TB 3

w/ Cloud Tier 912 TB (192 TB for Cloud Tier) 3 (plus 4 ES30s or 1 DS60 for Cloud Tier)

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 912 TB (192 TB for Cloud Tier) 4 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache, and 4 ES30s or 1 DS60 for Cloud Tier)

1. DS60 will only be partially filled.

A Cloud Tier system shares the ERSO cabling configuration; however, Cloud Tier has a lower maximum. It is recommended that the shelf with the greater number of drives should always be placed in the bottom position. only supports one DS60. only has one SAS SLIC and all DS60 connections are made to that single SAS SLIC. only has one SAS SLIC and all DS60 connections are made to that single SAS SLIC.

DD6800 137

DD6900

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD6900 system features DD6900 system specifications DD6900 storage capacity and configurations DD6900 front panel DD6900 SSD usage and configurations Rear panel PCIe HBAs DD6900 DIMM configurations DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities

DD6900 system features

Table 73. DD6900 system features

Feature Single Node HA

Processor 2 x Intel Xeon 4208, 8C, 2.10GHz, 85W

Kernel 4.4

Memory Configurations Total 288 GB

DIMMs 12 x 8 GB + 12 x 16 GB

HDD Drive Size 4TB ( 3 TB supported after controller upgrade)

Supported Capacity Active Tier 24 <-> 288 TBu

Cloud Tier 576 TBu

Disk Groups Active Tier 1 <-> 6 (4 TB), 1 <-> 8 (3 TB)

Cloud Tier (4 TB) 2

SSDs for DD OS in 2.5" bay in the head 4, 0.96 TB, 1 WPD

Stream Count 400 Wr, 110 Rd

Cache SSDs 1.2% 2 (Internal) 1.92 TB 2 (External FS25) 3.84 TB

Cache SSD shelf FS25 0 1

HA Private Interconnect N/A (2) 10G Base-T ports (NDC)

16 GB NVRAM 1

HW Accelerator 100 Quick Assist Technology (QAT) 8970

1

Internal SAS HBA330 12 Gbps SAS controller 1

External SAS PMC Quad Port 12 Gbps SAS 2 default, 3 supported

SAS String Depth (max) ES30/ES40 7

7

138 DD6900

Table 73. DD6900 system features (continued)

Feature Single Node HA

DS60 2

Host interface HBAs 2-port QL41000 25 GbE-SFP28 4 maximum

4-port QL41164 10 GbE-SFP+ 3 maximum

4-port QL41164 10GBASE-T 4 maximum

4-port QLE2694 16 Gb FC 3 maximum

Network Daughter Card option (system will have one of the two options)

4-port QL41000 10 GbE-SP+ FasLinQ

1

4-port QL41164 10GBASE-T 1

DD6900 system specifications

Figure 77. System dimensions

Table 74. DD6900 system specifications

Xa Xb Y Za (with bezel)

Za (without bezel)

Zb Zc

482.0 mm (18.98 inches)

434.0 mm (17.09 inches)

86.8 mm (3.42 inches)

35.84 mm (1.41 inches)

22.0 mm (0.87 inches)

678.8 mm (26.72 inches)

715.5 mm (28.17 inches)

A DD6900 system weighs up to 63.05 lbs (28.6 kg).

Table 75. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet (32.25 C at 10,000

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

DD6900 139

Table 75. System operating environment (continued)

Operating Acoustic Noise L wad sound power, 7.5 Bels

DD6900 storage capacity and configurations The following table provides storage capacity and configuration information for the DD6900 system:

Table 76. DD6900 storage capacity and configurations

Tier CPU-SP SKU Memory Front 2.5" SSDs Max. Useable Capacity

Cloud Tier Metadata

DD6900 8 core, 85 W 4208 288 GB (12 x 16 GB) + (12 x 8 GB)

1 (1.2%) 288 TB N/A

DD6900 with DD Cloud Tier1

8 core, 85 W 4208 288 GB (12 x 16 GB) + (12 x 8 GB)

1 (1.2%) 576 TB 120 TB raw/96 TB usable

1 DD Cloud Tier can be added to a DD6900 and is enabled by a license and disk packs for the DD Cloud Tier metadata.

The Memory column lists the total memory that is required and the number and type of the DIMMs used. All memory DIMMs are DDR4 RDIMMs at the highest supported speed of 2400MT/s.

High Availability

DD6900 supports Active-Passive High Availability (A-P HA or just A-P). The following table summarizes the hardware changes to support A-P HA:

Table 77. HA configuration requirements

Hardware Change to support HA

Active-Passive HA

Additional memory No extra memory required.

HA private interconnect Cluster Interconnect : A-P requires the use of two ports from the on-board quad-port 10 GbE Network Daughter Card.

NVRAM A-P requires a single 16 GB NVRAM card (same as non-HA).

SAS Connectivity Both nodes of an A-P HA pair require redundant SAS connectivity to the storage array. (Note: a single node system also has redundant connectivity to the storage array.)

SSD Requirements SSDs are contained within FS25 and are available from both nodes.

HA Network Interconnect

The HA Network Interconnect, required for HA configurations, is a dedicated 10 GbE connection between the two nodes of an HA pair. The interconnect is used to write data (and metadata) from the active node's NVRAM to the passive node's NVRAM.

Two 10GbE links are used to meet the bandwidth requirements for the private interconnect. Traffic across the private interconnect has roughly the same bandwidth as is written to the NVRAM card. The dual 10-GbE links can move about 2 GB/s in each direction.

HA SAS Interconnect

HA configurations require that the SSDs' cache drives be shared between both nodes and have redundant SAS connections to all shelves.

140 DD6900

DD6900 front panel

Figure 78. DD6900 front panel

Table 78. Front panel features

Item Ports, panels, and slots Description

1 Left control panel Contains system health and system ID, status LED, and optional iDRAC Quick Sync 2 (wireless).

2 Drive slots Enable you to install drives that are supported on your system.

3 Right control panel Contains the power button, VGA port, iDRAC Direct micro USB port, and two USB 2.0 ports.

4 Information tag The Information tag is a slide-out label panel that contains system information such as Service Tag, NIC, MAC address, and so on. If you have opted for the secure default access to iDRAC, the Information tag also contains the iDRAC secure default password.

Table 79. Front LEDs

Name Color Purpose

Control Panel Status LED Blue/Amber Status: Healthy: Solid Blue Fault: Blink Amber Sys ID: Blink Blue

System Power Button/LED Green Indication that the system has power.

Drive activity LEDs Green Lit green when the drive is powered. Blinks during drive activity.

Drive service LEDs Green Lit solid amber when a disk drive needs service.

Front LEDs

Figure 79. Front left control panel status LEDs

DD6900 141

NOTE: The indicators display solid amber if any error occurs.

Table 80. System health and system ID indicator codes

System health and ID indicator code

Solid blue Indicates that the system is turned on, system is healthy, and system ID mode is not active. Press the system health and system ID button to switch to system ID mode.

Blinking blue Indicates that the system ID mode is active. Press the system health and system ID button to switch to system health mode.

Solid amber Indicates that the system is in fail-safe mode.

Blinking amber Indicates that the system is experiencing a fault. Check the System event log or the LCD panel, if available on the bezel, for specific error messages.

Figure 80. Front right control panel power button LEDs

Table 81. Right control panel features

Item Indicator, button, or connector

Description

1 Power button Indicates if the system is turned on or off. Press the power button to manually turn on or off the system.

NOTE: Press the power button to gracefully shut down an ACPI-compliant operating system.

142 DD6900

Table 81. Right control panel features (continued)

Item Indicator, button, or connector

Description

2 USB port (2) The USB ports are 4-pin, 2.0-compliant. These ports enable you to connect USB devices to the system.

3 iDRAC Direct port The iDRAC Direct port is micro USB 2.0-compliant. This port enables you to access the iDRAC Direct features.

4 iDRAC Direct LED The iDRAC Direct LED indicator lights up to indicate that the iDRAC Direct port is connected.

5 VGA port Enables you to connect a display device to the system.

Table 82. iDRAC Direct LED indicator codes

iDRAC Direct LED indicator code Condition

Solid green for two seconds Indicates that the laptop or tablet is connected.

Flashing green (on for two seconds and off for two seconds)

Indicates that the laptop or tablet that is connected is recognized.

Turns of Indicates that the laptop or tablet is unplugged.

Figure 81. Drive LEDs

The front contains 25 2.5" disk drive slots that can be populated with SSDs. Each SSD is housed in a drive carrier that contains two LEDs at the bottom of the carrier. The carrier's left blue LED is lit whenever an SSD is present in the slot, and it blinks when I/O activity is occurring on the disk. The right amber LED is usually off and lights amber to indicate that the disk is faulted and must be serviced.

DD6900 SSD usage and configurations

DD6900 system uses an 8 x 2.5" drive slot midplane. In addition to the four 0.96TB SSD DD OS drives, two 1.92TB SSDs are needed for the metadata cache implementation for single node systems. For DD6900 HA systems, two 3.84 TB SSDs cache drives are used in the external FS25 shelf.

SSD configurations

The SSD slots on the front of the enclosure are shown below. The system come from the factory with SSDs populated in the enclosure.

DD6900 143

Figure 82. DD6900 SSD slot assignment

DD6900 supports 1.2% SSD options out of factory configurations. Based on 3.84 TB SSD capacity, the required number of SSDs for each DD6900 configuration is provided in the following table.

Table 83. DD6900 SSD configurations

Configuration Single node HA

Cache SSDs 2 (internal) 1.92 TB 2 (External FS25) 3.84 TB

The cache SSDs are installed right to left starting from slot 7 down.

SSD boot drives

Other SAS SSDs are used to boot the DD OS operating system. Boot disks and external disk shelves are used to log system information. Boot disks are installed from the other end of the front 2.5" disk slots to physically differentiate the cache SSDs.

Table 84. SSD boot drives

# of boot disks Installed in slots

Four 0.96TB SSDs 0,1,2,3

Rear panel

Figure 83. System rear panel

Item Panels, ports, and slots Description

1 Full-height PCIe expansion card slot (3)

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 1) connects up to three full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

144 DD6900

Item Panels, ports, and slots Description

2 Half-height PCIe expansion card slot

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 2) connects one half-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

3 Rear handle The rear handle can be removed to enable any external cabling of PCIe cards that are installed in the PCIe expansion card slot 6.

4 Full-height PCIe expansion card slot (2)

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 2) connects up to two full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

5 Full-height PCIe expansion card slot (2)

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 3) connects up to two full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

6 Power supply unit (2) Supports two AC power supply units (PSUs)

7 NIC ports The NIC ports that are integrated on the network daughter card (NDC) provide network connectivity.

8 USB port (2) The USB ports are 9-pin and 3.0-compliant. These ports enable you to connect USB devices to the system.

9 VGA port Enables you to connect a display device to the system.

10 Serial port Enables you to connect a serial device to the system.

11 iDRAC9 dedicated port Enables you to remotely access iDRAC.

12 System identification button The System Identification (ID) button is available on the front and back of the systems. Press the button to identify a system in a rack by turning on the system ID button. You can also use the system ID button to reset iDRAC and to access BIOS using the step through mode.

Rear LEDs

Figure 84. Onboard ID and iDRAC LEDs

1. iDRAC management port: a. The green link LED on the left is lit whenever there is link at 1000BaseT and 100BaseT speeds. The link LED is off when

the link speed is 10BaseT or there is no link. b. The green link LED on the right blinks whenever there is traffic on the port.

2. System identification LED: This blue LED can be turned on by software to visually identify the system.

PSU FRU LEDs

There are two power supplies, one in the upper left of the rear chassis and one on the bottom right. Each power supply has three LEDs: AC good, DC good, and Service. The top PSU is "right-side up" and the bottom PSU is "upside down."

DD6900 145

Table 85. PSU FRU LEDs

Name Color Definition

AC Good Green AC input is as expected.

DC Good Green DC output is as expected.

Service Amber PSU has a fault condition and a must be replaced.

PCIe HBAs

A slot in the chassis that does not contain an HBA must have a filler panel installed in the empty slots. This is required for EMI compliance.

This system supports nine I/O modules slots, seven of which are 8-lane PCIe Gen3, and two are 16-lane PCIe Gen3. Several networking, NVRAM, SAS, and Fibre Channel I/O modules are supported.

Slot assignment

The following table lists the DD6900 configuration slot assignments:

Table 86. DD6900 slot assignments

Description Slot

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GbE SFP+ PCIe, Full Height 5, 8, 1

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GBASE-T PCIe, Full Height 5, 8, 1

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GBASE-T PCIe, Low Profile 6

QLogic, 41262 2 Port, 25Gb SFP28 PCIe, Full Height 5, 8, 1

QLogic, 41262 2 Port, 25Gb SFP28 PCIe, Low Profile 6

HBA330 SAS Controller, 12Gbps Mini card mini/mono

QAT,INTEL,8970,FH, Avnet p/n 1QA89701G1P5 4

PM8072,SAS12,4P,FH, MicroSemi 2295200-R 3, 7, 5

FC16,QLE2694-DEL-BK,TRG,QP,FH 5, 8, 1

16GB NVRAM,FH 2

Host Interface (x16) is 2-port 100 Gb QSFP+ Ethernet.

Host Interface (x8) are:

2-port 25 Gb SFP28 Ethernet 4-port 10 Gb SFP+ Ethernet 4-port 10GBaseT Ethernet 4-port 16 Gb Fibre Channel

External SAS is 4-port 12 Gb SAS card and is required for external storage for HA and Single Node configurations.

NVRAM is the 16GB NVRAM.

Internal SAS Mezzanine is 2-port 12 Gb Mini-SAS HD SAS controller mezzanine.

Host Network Interface Mezzanine is either:

4-port 10GBaseSR SFP+ Ethernet mezzanine 4-port 10GBaseT RJ45 Ethernet mezzanine

146 DD6900

I/O population rules

The following figures show the I/O module slot numbers.

The slot labeled N is the network daughter card, which contains ports ethMa, ethMb, ethMc, and ethMd.

The physical interface name format for the other I/O module slots is ethXy, where X is the slot number and y is an alphanumeric character. For example, eth0a.

For most horizontal I/O module NIC interfaces, the port numbering goes from left to right, with ethXa on the left. The horizontal I/O module slots on the left-in slots 1-3 are inverted. The port numbering on these I/O modules in these slots goes from right to left, with ethXa on the right.

The management port ethMa is the first port set up by the Configuration Wizard. It is marked with a red rectangle in the figure below.

Figure 85. Slot numbering

The general population rules can be summarized as:

1. Populate a given I/O in the available slots listed. 2. Select the first available slot in the group. 3. Follow the steps for each I/O in the order specified. 4. Slots 4 and 8 should be reserved for x16 cards unless there are no available x8 slots.

NOTE: Installing HBAs requires opening the system and installing the HBA into the riser.

Riser# Slots (from top to bottom)

1 1, 2, 3

2 4, 5, 6, N

3 7, 8

Gen3 PCIe

Slots support Gen3 PCIe.

I/O module servicing

All I/O modules are user serviceable and may be replaced when the system is powered off. On-line service of I/O modules is not support. A module that is hot-inserted into the system will remain powered off and will not be powered on until the next reboot of the system. A module that is hot-removed causes an operating system to immediately reboot.

DD6900 DIMM configurations

The SP Module contains two Intel SP processors each with an integrated memory controller that supports six channels of DDR4 memory. The CPU enables two DIMM slots per channel, so the SP Module supports 24 DIMM slots.

Each DDR4 DIMM is connected to the system board through an industry standard 288-pin DDR4 DIMM connector. This system uses registered DIMMs with Dell EMC ControlCenter at 72 bits wide (64-bits data + 8-bits Dell EMC ControlCenter) up to a maximum of 2400MT/s speed.

DD6900 147

Table 87. Memory configurations

Tier Total Memory Memory DIMM Configuration

DD6900 Active Tier 288 GB 12 x 8 GB + 12 x 16 GB

DD6900 Cloud Tier 288 GB 12 x 8 GB + 12 x 16 GB

Memory locations

To ensure maximum memory performance, there are memory DIMM population rules so that the memory loading and interleaving are optimal. The following table specifies the DIMM location rules. Each DIMM location contains either a 8GB DIMM or a 16GB DIMM.

Table 88. DD6900 DIMM configuration CPU 1

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

A6 A12 A5 A11 A4 A10 A7 A1 A8 A2 A9 A3

144 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB

Table 89. DD6900 DIMM configuration CPU 2

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

B6 B12 B5 B11 B4 B10 B7 B1 B8 B2 B9 B3

144 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB 8 GB 16 GB

DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities

DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 do not store data on internal disk drives and rely on external disk array shelves to provide storage. DS60 disk shelves and ES40 shelves are connected to systems using 12 Gb Mini-SAS HD ports, which are implemented on the SAS HBAs.

The systems also support external metadata storage (cache) shelf FS25. External cache shelf only hosts DD OS depended metadata for performance acceleration.

The ES40 SAS shelf contains 15 drives, which includes 12 drives of usable storage, two parity drives, and one hot spare.

The DS60 shelf contains 60 drives. Drives are configured in four groups of 15 drives. Each group contains two parity drives and one hot spare, so each group provides 12 drives of usable storage. A fully configured DS60 shelf provides 48 drives of usable storage.

Table 90. Shelves shipped from factory, in rack

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB ES40 8 TB DS60 8 TB DS60

Table 91. Shelves shipped from factory, boxed

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB ES40 8 TB ES40 8 TB ES40

4 TB DS60 8 TB DS60 8 TB DS60

Table 92. Additional shelves supported

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB SAS ES30/DS60 4 TB SAS ES30/DS60 4 TB SAS ES30/DS60

148 DD6900

Table 92. Additional shelves supported (continued)

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

3 TB SAS ES30/DS60 3 TB SAS ES30/DS60 3 TB SAS ES30/DS60

NOTE: 3 TB shelves are only support on controller upgrades and not on fresh installs.

Table 93. Shelf usable capacities

Hard drive size (TB) Shelf Useable TB

4 ES40 48

4 DS60 192

8 DS60 384

The following table lists the maximum number of shelves per chain:

Table 94. Supported shelf count per chain

Shelf type Max # from factory Max # per chain

SAS ES30/ES40 4 7

DS60 2 3

DS60 + ES30/ES40 n/a 5

F25 1 1

The connector type for ES30 is Mini-SAS. Special cables may be necessary when combining ES30 and ES40 shelves on the same chain (enabled but not recommended).

DD9400 and DD9900 system capacities are optimized for use with DS60 shelves containing 8 TB drives. DS60 shelves can be populated with one to four packs of fifteen 8 TB, or 4 TB drives. Different 4 TB and 8 TB capacity disk packs may be mixed within a single DS60 shelf. ES40 SAS shelves and DS60 shelves of mixed capacities may be attached so long as the maximum storage capacity of the system is not exceeded.

DD6900 149

DD7200 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD7200 system features DD7200 system specifications DD7200 storage capacity Front Panel Back Panel I/O modules and slot assignments Internal system components DD7200 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD7200 and DS60 shelf guidelines

8

150 DD7200

DD7200 system features The table summarizes the DD7200 system features.

Table 95. DD7200 system features

Feature DD7200 (Base configuration)

DD7200 (Expanded configuration)

Rack height 4U, supported in four- post racks only

4U, supported in four-post racks only

Rack mounting Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.9 - 76.2 cm).

Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.9 - 76.2 cm).

Power 1 +1 redundant, hot- swappable power units

1 +1 redundant, hot-swappable power units

Processor Two 8-core processors Two 8-core processors

NVRAM One 4-GB NVRAM module (and companion BBU) for data integrity during a power outage

One 4-GB NVRAM module (and companion BBU) for data integrity during a power outage

Fans Hot-swappable, redundant, 5

Hot-swappable, redundant, 5

Memory 8 x 16 GB DIMM (128 GB)

16 x 16 GB DIMM (256 GB)

Internal drives SSD drives, 3 x 200 GB (base 10)

SSD drives, 3 x 200 GB (base 10)

I/O module slots Nine replaceable I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots, one BBU, one NVRAM, and one Management module slot. See Management module and interfaces on page 45 and I/O modules and slot assignments on page 47.

Nine replaceable I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots, one BBU, one NVRAM, and one Management module slot. See Management module and interfaces on page 45 and I/O modules and slot assignments on page 47.

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 12 x 2-TB or 8 x 3- TB shelves adding up to 285 TB of usable external capacity.

8 x 2-TB or 12 x 3-TB shelves adding up to 428 TB of usable external capacity.

DD Cloud Tier N/A 428 TB of Active Tier capacity, and 856 TB of Cloud Tier capacity. 4 x 4 TB shelves are required to store DD Cloud Tier metadata.

DD Extended Retention N/A 56 shelves adding up to a maximum of 856 GB of usable external capacity.

DD7200 151

DD7200 system specifications

Table 96. DD7200 system specifications

Model Watts BTU/hr Power Weight Width Depth Height

DD7200 800 2730 800 80 lb / 36.3 kg

17.5 in (44.5 cm)

33 in (84 cm) 7 in (17.8 cm)

Table 97. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

Operating Acoustic Noise Sound power, LWAd: 7.52 bels. Sound pressure, LpAm: 56.4 dB. (Declared noise emission per ISO 9296.)

152 DD7200

DD7200 storage capacity The table lists the capacities of the systems. Data Domain system internal indexes and other product components use variable amounts of storage, depending on the type of data and the sizes of files. If you send different datasets to otherwise identical systems, one system may, over time, have room for more or less actual backup data than another.

Table 98. DD7200 storage capacity

System/ Installed Memory

Internal Disks (SATA SSDs)

Data Storage Space External Storage3

DD7200

(2 SAS I/O modules)

128 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

285 TB Up to a maximum of 12 x 2-TB or 8 x 3-TB shelves.

DD7200

(2 SAS I/O modules)

256 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

428 TB Up to a maximum of 18 x 2-TB or 12 x 3-TB shelves.

DD7200 with DD Cloud Tier1

(4 SAS I/O modules)

256 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

428 TB (Active Tier) 192 TB (DD Cloud Tier

metadata) 856 TB (DD Cloud Tier)

Up to a maximum of 18 x 2-TB or 12 x 3-TB shelves.

4x4-TB shelves for DD Cloud Tier metadata.

DD7200 with Extended Retention software1

(4 SAS I/O modules)

256 GB

2.5 in. 3 @ 200 GB

No User Data

856 TB Up to a maximum of 36 x 2-TB or 24 x 3-TB shelves.

1Data Domain DD7200 controller with DD Extended Retention software.

2 Data Domain DD7200 controller with DD Cloud Tier.

3 The capacity differs depending on the size of the external storage shelves used. This data based on ES30 shelves.

DD7200 153

Front Panel The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the front of the system.

Figure 86. Front panel components

(1) Filler panel

(2) The red box indicates the system processor (SP) module

(3) SSD drive #1

(4) Fan #0

(5) Power supply #B

(6) AC power disconnect plug

(7) AC power extender module

Power supply units

A system has two power supply units, numbered A and B from the bottom up. Each power supply has its own integral cooling fan. Each power unit has three LEDs (see System LED legend label on page 43) that indicates the following states:

AC LED: Glows green when AC input is good DC LED: Glows green when DC output is good Symbol !: Glows solid or blinking amber for fault or attention

The AC power plugs are located to the right of each power supply. These plugs are pulled to disconnect AC power to each power supply.

AC power extender module

AC power entry is connected at the rear of the system. The AC power extender module provides power to the two power supplies on the front of the system. AC Power plugs are located in the front. The module is adjacent to the SP module and can be removed and replaced.

154 DD7200

Cooling Fans

A system contains five hot-swappable cooling fans in a 4+1 redundant configuration. The fans provide cooling for the processors, DIMMs, IO modules, and the management module. Each fan has a fault LED which causes the fan housing to glow amber. A system can run with one fan faulted or removed.

Solid-state drives

A system contains three hot-swappable 2.5" solid-state drive (SSD) bays that are located in the front and on top of the fan modules. There are four drive bays, with the left-most bay containing a blank. The next drive to the right of the blank is SSD #1, the next is #2, and the right-most bay contains SSD #3. No user backup data is kept on the SSDs.

Each drive has a blue colored power LED and an amber fault LED.

Front LED Indicators

The photo below indicates the location of the four system LEDs.

Figure 87. System LEDs

The next photo shows the location of the system LED legend label. Power supply LEDs on page 156 shows the power supply LEDs. Other front LEDs are shown in Fan and SSD LEDs on page 157. LED states are described in LED status indicators on page 157.

DD7200 155

Figure 88. System LED legend label

The power supply LEDs include:

AC LED on top DC LED in the middle Failure LED on the bottom

Figure 89. Power supply LEDs

Each SSD has two LEDs as shown in the following figure. The lower left corner of the housing around each fan acts as an LED, glowing amber when the fan has failed.

156 DD7200

Figure 90. Fan and SSD LEDs

Table 99. LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

System Dot within a circle (top LED) Blue indicates power on and normal operation.

System, SP fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates failure.

System, chassis fault Exclamation point within a triangle with a light below

Dark indicates normal operation. Yellow indicates a fault condition.

System Marked out hand within a black square (bottom LED)

White warms not to remove the unit.

Power supply AC LED Steady green indicates normal AC power.

Power supply DC LED Steady green indicates normal DC power.

Power supply Failure LED Solid amber indicates a failed power supply.

SSD Top LED Solid blue, disk ready, blinks while busy.

SSD Bottom LED Dark indicates healthy. Solid amber indicates disk fail.

Fan Fan housing The fan housing glows an amber color during fan failure.

DD7200 157

Back Panel The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the back of the system.

Figure 91. Features on rear of chassis

1. Upper level contains all blanks 2. AC power extender module 3. Management module (slot Mgmt A) 4. Red box indicating I/O modules (slots 0-8) 5. Battery backup (BBU in slot 9) 6. NVRAM module (slot 10) 7. Cage covering the BBU and NVRAM combination module 8. I/O LED at the end of each I/O module handle 9. Location of serial number label/tag

NOTE: For modules containing multiple ports, the bottom port is numbered as zero (0) with numbers increasing going

upward.

I/O module LEDs

Each I/O module ejector handle contains a bi-colored LED. Green indicates normal function, while an amber color indicates a fault condition.

Management module and interfaces

The management module is on the left-most side when facing the back of the system, in slot Mgmt A. The process to remove and add a management module is the same as the I/O modules, however, the management module can only be accommodated in Mgmt A slot.

The management module contains one external LAN connection for management access to the SP module. One micro DB-9 connector is included to provide the console. A USB port is provided for use during service of the system to allow booting from a USB flash device.

158 DD7200

Figure 92. Interfaces on the management module

1 - Ethernet port 2 - USB port 3 - Micro serial port

DD7200 159

I/O modules and slot assignments The table shows the I/O module slot assignments for the systems. See Features on rear of chassis on page 45 for a view of the slot positions on the back panel and Top view of SP module with SP cover removed on page 49 for a top view.

Table 100. DD7200 slot assignments

Slot Number DD7200 DD7200 with Extended Retention Software

DD7200 with DD Cloud Tier

MGMT A Management module Management module Management module

0 Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

1 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

2 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

3 FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

4 Ethernet or empty Ethernet or empty Ethernet or empty

5 Ethernet or empty SAS SAS

6 Empty SAS SAS

7 SAS SAS SAS

8 SAS SAS SAS

9 BBU BBU BBU

10 NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM

Slot addition rules

A maximum of six optional I/O modules (FC plus Ethernet) are allowed in systems without Extended Retention software, and a maximum of five optional I/O modules (FC plus Ethernet) are allowed in systems with Extended Retention software.

Additional FC modules should be installed in numerically increasing slot numbers immediately to the right of the existing FC modules, or starting in slot 0 if no FC modules were originally installed. A maximum of four FC modules are allowed in a system.

Additional Ethernet modules should be installed in numerically decreasing slot numbers immediately to the left of the existing Ethernet modules or starting in slot 4 if no Ethernet modules were originally installed. For systems without Extended Retention software, a maximum of six (limited to four of any one type) Ethernet modules can be present. For systems with Extended Retention software, a maximum of five (limited to four of any one type) Ethernet modules can be present.

All systems include two SAS modules in slots 7 and 8. Systems with Extended Retention software must have two additional SAS modules in slots 5 and 6.

For systems without Extended Retention software, if adding I/O modules results in the allowed maximum of six I/O modules present, slot 5 is used. Slot 5 is only used for an Ethernet module. Adding FC modules in this specific case require moving an existing Ethernet module to slot 5. Other than this specific case, it is not recommended to move I/O modules between slots.

Adding Extended Retention software to a system includes adding two SAS modules in slots 5 and 6. If the system originally had the maximum of 6 optional I/O modules, the I/O module in slot 5 must be permanently removed from the system.

Fibre Channel (FC) I/O Module Option

An FC I/O module is a dual-port Fibre Channel module. The optional virtual tape library (VTL) feature requires at least one FC I/O module. Boost over Fiber Channel is optional and the total FC HBAs cannot exceed more than allowable Fibre Channel cards per controller.

Ethernet I/O Module Options

The available Ethernet I/O modules are:

Dual Port 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors

160 DD7200

Dual Port 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad Port 1000Base-T Copper with RJ-45 connectors Quad port 2 port 1000Base-T Copper (RJ45) /2 port 1000Base-SR Optical

DD7200 161

Internal system components The photo shows the system with the system processor (SP) module that is removed from the chassis and the SP cover removed.

Figure 93. Top view of SP module with SP cover removed

1 - Front of system 2 - Four groups of 4 DIMM cards

DIMM modules

DD7200 systems with 128 GB of memory contain 8 x 16 GB DIMMs, with 8 empty DIMM slots. DD7200 systems with 256 GB of memory contain 16 x 16 GB DIMMs.

DD7200 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The Data Domain system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your Data Domain system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your Data Domain system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A Data Domain system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

NOTE:

ES30 SAS shelves must be running DD OS 5.4 or later.

ES30-45 SATA shelves must be running DD OS 5.4 or later.

DD OS 5.7 and later support 4TB drives.

162 DD7200

Table 101. DD7200 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD7200 128 2x4 SAS 30, 45; SATA 15, 30, 453

54 4 192 256

DD7200 256 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 453

54 4 384 540

DD7200 ER5, 6 256 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 453

7 8 768 1024

DD7200 w/ DD Cloud Tier7

256 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 453

54 4 384 (max), additional 192 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

512 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to DD Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. ES30-45 (SATA) is only supported with DD OS 5.4 or later.

4. 5 shelves maximum with ES30, 4 is the recommended maximum. 4 shelves maximum with ES20, 3 is the recommended maximum.

5. With Extended Retention software.

6. The maximum shelf count for any specific drive/shelf size might be less than the product of max shelves x max shelves per set.

7. Only available with DD OS 6.0.

Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

The following figures show single phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

DD7200 163

Figure 94. Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

164 DD7200

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

ES30 and DD7200 cabling

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of ES20, ES30 SATA, and ES30 SAS shelves to your system. If a system does not follow ALL of these rules it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES20 and ES30 shelves in the same set. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. The maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table cannot be exceeded. You cannot have more than four ES20s in a single set (maximum preference is three). You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum preference is four). You can have a maximum of seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for the metadata shelves for DD Cloud Tier configurations. These

shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

NOTE: An ES20 requires more power than an ES30. Ensure that your rack is configured to handle the power needs.

The tables below show how to configure a mixed system. To use the tables, go to the appropriate system. Then find the number of ES20s that are to be configured in the first column. The next column defines the number of ES20 sets. If there are multiple rows with the same number of ES20s then pick the row with the appropriate number of ES20 SATA shelves. The next column in that row defines the number of sets of ES30 SATA shelves. Finally, there may be entries for the number of desired ES30 SAS shelves and the number of sets to be used.

If the combinations of shelves exceed the supported usable storage, there may not be an entry. The entries are based on the smallest usable storage per shelf type (12TB for ES20, 12 TB for ES30 SATA, and 24TB for ES30 SAS). Always check that the sum of the usable storage of all of the shelves does not exceed the supported usable storage of the configuration.

Table 102. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Minimum appliance shelf count

Maximum appliance shelf count

DD Cloud Tier systems in TB

Extended Retention systems (ER) in TB

Max shelves for ER

7200 (384)

3 20 428 240 for

metadata

DD OS 5.4 and earlier: 1728 DD OS 5.5 and later: 768

56

Systems without Extended Retention or DD Cloud Tier all support four chains. The following tables show combinations of ES20 and ES30 shelves. For combinations of any two types of shelves, these tables can be used as a guide.

Table 103. DD7200 cabling information

DD7200

ES20 ES20 chains ES30 SATA ES30 SATA chains ES30 SAS ES30 SAS chains

DD7200 165

Table 103. DD7200 cabling information (continued)

DD7200

13-16 4 0 0 0 0

9-12 3 1-5 1 0 0

9-12 3 0 0 1-5 1

5-8 2 1-5 1 1-5 1

5-8 2 6-8 2 0 0

5-8 2 0 0 1-5 1

5-8 2 0 0 6-10 2

1-4 1 11-15 3 0 0

1-4 1 6-10 2 1-5 1

1-4 1 1-5 1 1-5 1

1-4 1 1-5 1 6-10 2

1-4 1 0 0 1-5 1

1-4 1 0 0 6-10 2

1-4 1 0 0 11-15 3

0 0 16-20 4 0 0

0 0 11-15 3 1-5 1

0 0 6-10 2 1-5 1

0 0 6-10 2 6-10 2

0 0 1-5 1 1-5 1

0 0 1-5 1 6-10 2

0 0 1-5 1 11-15 3

0 0 0 0 1-4 1

0 0 0 0 5-8 2

0 0 0 0 9-12 3

0 0 0 0 13-16/18 4

The following figures show cabling for base systems, systems with the Extended Retention software option, and systems integrated with an Avamar system.

166 DD7200

Figure 95. Recommended DD7200 cabling

DD7200 167

Figure 96. Recommended cabling for DD7200 integrated with Avamar

168 DD7200

Figure 97. Recommended cabling for DD7200 with extended retention software or DD Cloud Tier

DD7200 169

Figure 98. Recommended cabling for DD7200 with extended retention and integrated with Avamar

170 DD7200

DD7200 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The Data Domain system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your Data Domain system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a Data Domain system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O

modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your Data Domain system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A Data Domain system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5. DD OS 5.7.1 does not support HA with SATA drives.

Table 104. DD7200 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD7200 128 2x4 SAS 45 2 4 288 360

DD7200 256 2x4 SAS 45, 60 2 4 432 540

DD7200 ER 2 256 4x4 SAS 45, 60 2 8 864 1080

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. With Extended Retention software.

Single phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

The following figures show single phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

DD7200 171

Figure 99. Single phase power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks used for several Data Domain systems. In those situations it is desirable to balance the current draw across all 3 phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal

172 DD7200

configuration is dependent on the specific installation. The following figures show recommended 3-phase power connections for several Data Domain systems.

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase delta power connections.

Figure 100. 3-phase delta power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)

DD7200 173

Figure 101. 3-phase delta power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

NOTE: The next few diagrams show recommended 3-phase wye power connections.

174 DD7200

Figure 102. 3-phase wye power connections for DS60 expansion shelves (full-racked)

DD7200 175

Figure 103. 3-phase wye power connections for DD4200, DD4500, and DD7200 systems

DS60 and DD7200 cabling

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

176 DD7200

CAUTION: If a system does not follow all these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of usable capacity displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot connect more than two DS60 shelves in a single set.

Table 105. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance shelf count

DD7200 384 TB 1

Mixing DS60, ES30, and ES20 shelves:

The non-Extended Retention versions of these systems all support four chains.

Extra planning and reconfiguration may be required to add DS60 shelves to system with ES20 shelves, ES30 SATA shelves, or a combination of shelves.

The ES20 shelves must be on their own set. Minimize the ES20 set count by combining up to four ES20s per set. ES30 SATA shelves must also be on their own sets. Minimize the ES30 set count by combining up to five ES30s per set. If

required, combine up to seven ES30 SAS shelves per set to minimize the set count. A set can contain a maximum of two DS60 shelves and, if required because of other restrictions, add ES30 SAS shelves up

to a maximum of five shelves in that set.

NOTE: The configuration rules apply also to Extended Retention systems.

The following figures show cabling for base systems and systems with the Extended Retention software.

NOTE: It is recommended that the DS60 shelf with the greater number of drives should always be placed in the bottom

position.

DD7200 177

Figure 104. Recommended cabling for DD7200 (3TB drives)

178 DD7200

Figure 105. Recommended cabling for DD7200 (4TB drives)

DD7200 179

Figure 106. Recommended cabling for DD7200 (3TB drives) with Extended Retention software

180 DD7200

Figure 107. Recommended cabling for DD7200 with DD Cloud Tier

DD7200 181

Figure 108. Recommended cabling for DD7200 (4TB drives) with Extended Retention software

182 DD7200

DD9300 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

system features system specifications DD9300 storage capacity DD9300 front panel Back panel I/O modules Internal system components DD9300 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD9300 and DS60 shelf guidelines

system features Table 106. system features

Feature (Base configuration) (Expanded configuration)

Rack height 2U 2U

Processor E5-2680 V3 E5-2680 V3

Kernel 3.2.x 3.2.x

NVRAM NVRAM 8g Model 3 NVRAM 8g Model 3

Memory 4 x 32 GB DIMM + 4 x 16 GB DIMM (192 GB)

8 x 32 GB DIMM + 8 x 16 GB DIMM (384 GB)

Internal drives HDDs in 3.5" bays 4 4

SSDs in 3.5" bays 5 8

SSDs in 2.5" bays 0 0

I/O module slots SAS I/O modules (Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS)

2 2

Network and FC I/O modules Four replaceable I/O module slots.

Not hot-swappable.

Four replaceable I/O module slots.

Not hot-swappable.

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 384 TB 720 TB

DD Cloud Tier N/A 1440 TB a

Extended retention N/A 720 TBb

High availability support Yes Yes

HA private interconnect (2) 10GBase-T ports (2) 10GBase-T ports

External SSD shelf One SSD shelf for A-P high availability cluster containing two drives.

One SSD shelf for A-P high availability cluster containing four drives.

9

DD9300 183

Table 106. system features (continued)

Feature (Base configuration) (Expanded configuration)

SAS string depth (max) ES30 6 6 (7 for extended retention)

DS60 3 3

ES30 and DS60 5 shelves total 5 shelves total

Stream count 810 writes, 225 reads 810 writes, 225 reads

a. DD Cloud Tier requires four ES30 shelves fully populated with 4 TB drives to store DD Cloud Tier metadata. b. Extended retention not available on HA configurations

system specifications Table 107. system specifications

Model Average power consumption 25 C

Heat dissipation (operating maximum)

Weight a Width Depth Height

645W 1.69 x 106 J/hr (1604 Btu/hr) maximum

70 lbs (31.75 kg)

17.50 in (44.45 cm)

30.5 in (77.5 cm) 3.40 in (8.64 cm)

a. The weight does not include mounting rails. Allow 2.3-4.5 kg (5-10 lb) for a rail set.

Table 108. System operating environment

Requirement Description

Ambient temperature 10C - 35C; derate 1.1C per 1,000 ft (304 m)

Relative humidity (extremes) 2080% noncondensing

Elevation 0 - 7,500ft (0 - 2,268m)

Operating acoustic noise Lwad sound power, 7.5 Bels

DD9300 storage capacity

The following table provides storage capacity information for the DD9300 system.

Table 109. DD9300 storage capacity

Memory Internal disks (system disks only)

External storage (raw)

Usable data storage space (TB/TiB/GB/GiB)a

192 GB (Base) 4 x 4 TB HDD

5 x 800 GB SSD

480 TBb 384 TB 349.2 TiB 384,000 GB 357,628 GiB

384 GB (Expanded)

4 x 4 TB HDD

8 x 800 GB SSD

Active Tier: 900 TBb

Archive Tier: 900 TBc

Cloud Tier: 1800 TB in the cloudd

Active Tier: 720 TB

Archive Tier: 720 TB

Cloud Tier: 1,440 TB

Active Tier: 654.8 TiB

Archive Tier: 654.8 TiB

Cloud Tier: 1,309.6 TiB

Active Tier: 720,000 GB

Archive Tier: 720,000 GB

Cloud Tier: 144,000 GB

Active Tier: 670,552 GiB

Archive Tier: 670,552 GiB

Cloud Tier: 1,341,104 GiB

184 DD9300

Table 109. DD9300 storage capacity (continued)

Memory Internal disks (system disks only)

External storage (raw)

Usable data storage space (TB/TiB/GB/GiB)a

Cloud Tier metadata: 240 TB local storage

Cloud Tier metadata: 192 TB

Cloud Tier metadata: 174.6 TiB

Cloud Tier metadata: 192,000 GB

Cloud Tier metadata: 178,814 GiB

a. The capacity differs depending on the size of the external storage shelves used. This data based on ES30 shelves. b. HA is supported. c. HA is not supported with Extended Retention. d. HA is supported in combination with Cloud Tier.

DD9300 front panel

DD9300 Dataless Head (DLH) systems have one of the following front panel drive configurations to host the DD OS boot drives and provide metadata caching on SSD:

Table 110. DD9300 DLH SSD requirements

Configuration Number of SSDs

DD9300 5

DD9300 expanded 8

NOTE: SSDs are not RAID-protected.

Table 111. DD9300 DLH configuration drive layout

Slot 0: HDD 1 Slot 1: HDD 2 Slot 2: HDD 3 Slot 3: HDD 4

Slot 4: SSD 1 Slot 5: SSD 2 Slot 6: SSD 3 Slot 7: SSD 4

Slot 8: SSD 5 Slot 9: Filler Slot 10: Filler Slot 11: Filler

Table 112. DD9300 DLH expanded configuration drive layout

Slot 0: HDD 1 Slot 1: HDD 2 Slot 2: HDD 3 Slot 3: HDD 4

Slot 4: SSD 1 Slot 5: SSD 2 Slot 6: SSD 3 Slot 7: SSD 4

Slot 8: SSD 5 Slot 9: SSD 6 Slot 10: SSD 7 Slot 11: SSD 8

Front LED indicators

The front of the system contain 12 disk drive status LEDs that are normally blue, and blink when there is activity on the disk. The LEDs are shaped like triangles, and the apex of the triangle points left or right, indicating that disk's status. If the disk drive has a failure, the disks status LED turns from blue to amber, indicating that a drive must be replaced.

The front also contains two system status LEDs. A blue system power LED is present that is on whenever the system has power. An amber system fault LED is also present that is normally off and lit amber whenever the chassis or any other FRU in the system requires service.

DD9300 185

Figure 109. Front LED indicators

1. System service LED 2. Drive activity/service LED 3. System power LED

Table 113. Front LEDs

Name Color Purpose

System power LED Blue Indication that the system has power.

System service LED Amber Normally off; is lit amber whenever the SP or any other FRU (except disk drives) in the system requires service.

Drive activity/Service LED Blue /Amber Lit blue when the drive is powered. Blinks blue during drive activity. Lit solid amber when a disk needs

service.

186 DD9300

Back panel The back panel of the chassis contains the following components:

1. Management panel 2. Not Used -- Two 2.5" SSD slots labeled 0 and 1

3. I/O module slots 4. Power supply modules (PSU 0 is the lower module, and PSU 1 is the upper module)

Rear LED indicators

Figure 110. Rear LED indicators

1. Do not remove LED 2. SP service LED 3. System power LED 4. AC power good LED 5. DC power good LED 6. Power supply fault LED

Name of LED Location Color Definition

"Do not remove" LED Upper left-most part of rear chassis

White This LED is lit during system BIOS and BMC firmware updates and indicates that the SP should not be removed from the chassis, nor should system power be removed.

SP service LED To the right of "Do not remove" LED

Amber Solid amber - SP or a FRU inside the SP requires service

Blinking amber - blink rate reflects one of the following is booting BIOS - 1/4 Hz POST - 1 Hz OS - 4 Hz

Drive Power/Activity LED a Left LED on the SSD Blue Lit blue when the drive is powered. Blinks during drive activity.

DD9300 187

Name of LED Location Color Definition

Drive Fault LED a Right LED on the SSD Amber Lit solid amber when a drive needs service.

System power LED Right-most LED on the management panel

Blue SP has good, stable power

PSU FRU LED - AC Good Top LED on power supply Green AC input is as expected

PSU FRU LED - DC Good Middle LED on power supply Green DC output is as expected

PSU FRU LED - Attention Bottom LED on power supply Amber PSU has encountered a fault condition

a. The SSD is only present on DD6300 systems.

Figure 111. I/O module Power/Service LED location

1. I/O module power/service LED

Table 114. I/O LEDs

Name of LED Location Color Definition

I/O module FRU LED - I/O module Power/Service LED location on page 188

Ejector handle of I/O modules Green/Amber Green - I/O module has power and is functioning normally

Amber - I/O module has encountered a fault condition and requires service

188 DD9300

Table 114. I/O LEDs (continued)

Name of LED Location Color Definition

I/O port status LED (SAS, Fibre Channel, and optical networking I/O modules only)

One LED per I/O module port Blue Lit when port is enabled. May flash if SW "marks" the port. a

a. For RJ45 networking ports, the standard green link and amber activity LEDs are used.

Figure 112. Onboard network port LEDs

1. Network port link LED 2. Network port activity LED 3. Dedicated IPMI port BMC0A 4. Management interface EthMa

Table 115. Onboard network port LEDs

Name of LED Location Color Definition

Onboard network port LED - Link LED Onboard network port LEDs on page 189

Top LED on network port Green Lit when there is a link at 1000BaseT and 100BaseT speeds

Off when the link speed is 10BaseT or there is no link

Onboard network port LED - Activity LED

Bottom LED on network port Amber Blinks when there is traffic on the port

I/O modules

I/O module slot numbering

The eight I/O module slots are enumerated as Slot 0 (on the left when viewed from the rear) through Slot 7. Ports on an I/O module are enumerated as 0 through 3, with 0 being on the bottom.

Figure 113. I/O module slot numbering

1. Slot 0 2. Slot 1 3. Slot 2

DD9300 189

4. Slot 3 5. Slot 4 6. Slot 5 7. Slot 6 8. Slot 7

I/O modules are only supported in fixed configurations. The fixed configurations define the exact slots into which the I/O modules may be inserted. The processors directly drive the eight I/O module slots, meaning all slots are full performance.

The non-optional SAS, NVRAM, and 10GBaseT I/O modules are allocated to fixed slots. The optional Host Interface I/O modules are used for front end networking and Fibre Channel connections. The quantity and type of these I/O modules is customizable, and there are many valid configurations.

slot map

I/O module slots 36 contain optional Host Interface I/O modules and can contain specific I/O modules or no I/O modules at all. Slot 0, Slot 1, Slot 2, and Slot 7 are populated with the required I/O modules and are not optional.

Table 116. I/O module slot mapping

Tier Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7

DLH NVRAM 8g Model 3

Quad Port 10 GBase-T

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

DLH Extended Retention/DD Cloud Tier

DLH High Availability

NVRAM 8g Model 3

Quad Port 10 GBase-T for HA interconn ect

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 10GbE SR, Quad Port 10 GBase-T, or Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS

I/O module population rules

The system chassis has eight slots for I/O modules. Slots 0, 1, 2, and 7 are reserved. Slots 3, 4, 5, and 6 support host interface I/O modules. The maximum supported number of any type of host interface I/O module is four.

NOTE: A maximum of three Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules are supported in slots 3-6 because of the mandatory Quad

Port 10 GBase-T I/O module in slot 1.

The following table assigns rules for populating the I/O modules.

Table 117. I/O module slot population rules

Step I/O module name Slots Notes

Step 1: Populate mandatory I/O modules

NVRAM 8g Model 3 0 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 10 GBase-T 1 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS 2 Mandatory for all configurations

Quad Port 6 Gbps SAS 7 Mandatory for all configurations

190 DD9300

Table 117. I/O module slot population rules (continued)

Step I/O module name Slots Notes

Step 2: Populate all Quad Port 10GbE SR I/O modules

Quad Port 10GbE SR 3, 4, 5, 6 Populate starting from the lowest available slot number.

Step 3: Populate all Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules

Quad Port 10 GBase-T 3, 4, 5, 6 Populate starting from the lowest available slot number. With Quad Port 10 GBase-T in slot 1, max number of Quad Port 10 GBase-T I/O modules are limited to 4.

Step 4: Populate all Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel I/O modules

Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel

6, 5, 4, 3 Populate starting from the highest available slot number.

DD9300 191

Internal system components The following figure shows the layout of the CPUs and DIMMs inside the chassis. The front of the system is at the top of the figure.

Figure 114. CPU and memory locations

DIMMs overview

Dual in-line memory modules (DIMM) come in various sizes, which must be configured in a certain way. This topic can help you select the correct configuration when servicing DIMMs.

The storage processor contains two Intel processors each with an integrated memory controller that supports four channels of memory. The storage processor allows two DIMM slots per channel, so the storage processor supports a total of 16 DIMM slots.

memory DIMM configuration

Table 118. memory DIMM configuration

Tier Total Memory Memory DIMM Configuration

DLH Expanded 384 GB 8 x 32 GB + 8 x 16 GB

DLH 192 GB 4 x 32 GB + 4 x 16 GB

DLH Extended Retention/DD Cloud Tier 384 GB 8 x 32 GB +8 x 16 GB

HA is supported with all available memory configurations.

To ensure maximum memory performance, there are memory DIMM population rules for best memory loading and interleaving. Memory locations - CPU 0 on page 192 and Memory locations - CPU 1 on page 192 specify the DIMM location rules for various memory configurations:

Table 119. Memory locations - CPU 0

Channel A Channel B Channel D Channel C

Tier Total Memory

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DLH Expanded 384 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

DLH 192 GB 16 GB N/A 16 GB N/A N/A 32 GB N/A 32 GB

DLH Extended Retention/DD Cloud Tier

384 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

Table 120. Memory locations - CPU 1

Channel A Channel B Channel D Channel C

192 DD9300

Table 120. Memory locations - CPU 1 (continued)

Tier Total Memory

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DLH Expanded

384 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

DLH 192 GB 32 GB N/A 32 GB N/A N/A 16 GB N/A 16 GB

DLH Extended Retention/DD Cloud Tier

384 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

DD9300 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. DD6800 systems support ES30 SATA shelves after controller upgrades from older models. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

Table 121. DD9300 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD9300 192 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 384 480

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity 4

384 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 720 900

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity or w/ HA 4

384 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

7 3 4 720 900

DD9300 w/ ER 384 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 1440 1800

DD9300 Expanded Capacity w/ Cloud Tier

384 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 3 4 720 (max), additional 192 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

900 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity or w/ HA and Cloud Tier 4

384 2x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

7 3 4 720 (max), additional 192 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

900 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. Recommended configurations start at four shelves per set and expand beyond that as required. For HA configurations, the counts as a shelf.

DD9300 193

4. DDOS 6.x and greater and SSD shelf configuration

Types of cabinets and power connections

The ES30 chassis is installed in two types of racks: 40U-C (existing racks) and the 40U-P (newer racks). The racks use one phase or 3-phase power connections.

3-Phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks that are used for several systems. In those situations, it is desirable to balance the current draw across all three phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration depends on the specific installation.

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

DD6300, DD6800, and DD9300 shelf configurations

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

CAUTION: If a system does not follow ALL of these rules it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the cabling table for each system. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier

configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 122. Minimum and maximum configurations

System Appliance Minimum appliance shelf count*

Max appliance shelf count

48 TB usable 0 1

w/ Expansion 144 TB usable 1 5

144 TB usable 2 28

w/ Expansion 288 TB usable 2 28

w/ High Availability (HA) 288 TB usable 2 28

w/ Extended Retention (ER) 576 TB usable 2 28

194 DD9300

Table 122. Minimum and maximum configurations (continued)

System Appliance Minimum appliance shelf count*

Max appliance shelf count

w/ Cloud Tier 288 TB usable (96 TB for Cloud Tier)

2 28

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 288 TB usable (96 TB for Cloud Tier)

2 28

384 TB usable 3 28

w/ Expansion 720 TB usable 3 28

w/ HA 720 TB usable 3 28

w/ ER 1440 TB usable 7 28

w/ Cloud Tier 720 TB usable (192 TB for Cloud Tier)

7 28

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 720 TB usable (192 TB for Cloud Tier)

7 28

* The minimum appliance shelf count does not include shelves for Cloud Tier.

DD9300 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5.

Table 123. DD9300 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD9300 2, 3, 4 1925 2x4 SAS 45, 60 3 4 384 480

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity 2, 3, 6

384 2x4 SAS 45, 60 3 4 720 900

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ HA 2, 3

384 2x4 SAS 45, 60 3 4 720 900

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ ER 2, 3, 7

384 2x4 SAS 45, 60 3 4 1440 1800

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity and w/ Cloud Tier 3,

8

384 2x4 SAS 45, 60 3 4 720 + 192 for Cloud Tier

900 + 240 for Cloud Tier

DD9300 w/ Expanded Capacity

384 2x4 SAS 45, 60 3 4 720 + 192 for Cloud Tier

900 + 240 for Cloud Tier

DD9300 195

Table 123. DD9300 and DS60 shelf configuration (continued)

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

and w/ HA and Cloud Tier 3, 8

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. With DD OS 6.x and greater & SSD.

3. Only available with DD OS 6.x and greater.

4. DD9300 base support 2.5 DS60-4 180 x 2 plus DS60-2 90, if a half-filled DS60 is necessary.

5. While it is 192GB, it is a different memory DIMM configuration compared to DD6300 's 192GB.

6. DD9300 Expanded supports five DS60 maximum.

7. There is no support for HA with SATA drives.

8. The maximum shelf count for any specific drive/shelf size might be less than the product of max shelves x max shelves per set.

3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks used for several systems. In those situations it is desirable to balance the current draw across all 3 phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration is dependent on the specific installation.

shelf configurations

There are a few rules that must be followed when adding a mixture of DS60 and other shelf types to your system.

CAUTION: If a system does not follow all these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in cabling table for each system. You cannot connect more than three DS60 shelves in a single set.

Table 124. Minimum configurations

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance DS60 shelf count

144 TB 0

144 TB 2

w/ High Availability (HA) 288 TB 2 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache)

w/ Extended Retention (ER) 576 TB 2

w/ Cloud Tier 384 TB (96 TB for Cloud Tier) 2 (plus 2 ES30s for Cloud Tier)

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 384 TB (96 TB for Cloud Tier) 2 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache, and 2 ES30s for Cloud Tier)

384 TB 3

w/ HA 720 TB 3 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache)

w/ ER 1440 TB 3

w/ Cloud Tier 912 TB (192 TB for Cloud Tier) 3 (plus 4 ES30s or 1 DS60 for Cloud Tier)

196 DD9300

Table 124. Minimum configurations (continued)

System Appliance maximum Minimum appliance DS60 shelf count

w/ HA and Cloud Tier 912 TB (192 TB for Cloud Tier) 4 (plus 1 FS15 for SSD cache, and 4 ES30s or 1 DS60 for Cloud Tier)

1. DS60 will only be partially filled.

A Cloud Tier system shares the ERSO cabling configuration; however, Cloud Tier has a lower maximum. It is recommended that the shelf with the greater number of drives should always be placed in the bottom position. only supports one DS60. only has one SAS SLIC and all DS60 connections are made to that single SAS SLIC. only has one SAS SLIC and all DS60 connections are made to that single SAS SLIC.

DD9300 197

DD9400

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD9400 system features DD9400 system specifications DD9400 storage capacity and configurations DD9400 front panel DD9400 SSD usage and configurations Rear panel PCIe HBAs DD9400 DIMM configurations DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities

DD9400 system features

Table 125. DD9400 system features

Features Single Node HA

Processor 2 x Intel Xeon 5218, 16C, 2.3GHz, 125W

Kernel 4.4

Memory Configurations Total 576 GB

DIMMs 12 x 16 GB + 12 x 32 GB

HDD Drive Size 8 TB ( 3 TB and 4 TB also supported)

Supported Capacity Active Tier 192 <-> 768 TBu

Cloud Tier 1536 TBu

Disk Groups Active Tier 4 <-> 10 (8 TB), 4 <-> 16 (4 TB), 4 <-> 21 (3 TB)

Cloud Tier (4 TB) 4

SSDs for DD OS in 2.5" bays in head 4, 1.92 TB, 1 WPD

Stream Count 800 Wr, 220 Rd

Cache SSDs in 2.5" 2.5% 5 (internal) 3.84 TB 5 (External FS25) 3.84 TB

Cache SSD shelf FS25 0 1

HA Private Interconnect N/A (2) 10G Base-T ports (NDC)

16 GB NVRAM 1

HW Accelerator 100 Quick Assist Technology (QAT) 8970

1

Internal SAS HBA330 12 Gbps SAS controller

1

External SAS PMC Quad Port 12 Gbps SAS

2 default, 3 supported

10

198 DD9400

Table 125. DD9400 system features (continued)

Features Single Node HA

SAS String Depth (max) ES30/ES40 7

DS60 3

Host interface HBAs 2-port QL41000 25 GbE- SFP28

4 maximum

4-port QL41164 10 GbE- SFP+

4 maximum

4-port QL41164 10GBASE- T

4 maximum

4-port QLE2694 16 Gb FC 3 maximum

Network Daughter Card option (system will have one of the two options)

4-port QL41000 10 GbE- SP+ FasLinQ

1

4-port QL41164 10GBASE- T

1

DD9400 system specifications

Figure 115. System dimensions

Table 126. DD9400 system specifications

Xa Xb Y Za (with bezel)

Za (without bezel)

Zb Zc

482.0 mm (18.98 inches)

434.0 mm (17.09 inches)

86.8 mm (3.42 inches)

35.84 mm (1.41 inches)

22.0 mm (0.87 inches)

678.8 mm (26.72 inches)

715.5 mm (28.17 inches)

A DD9400 system weighs up to 63.05 lbs (28.6 kg).

DD9400 199

Table 127. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet (32.25 C at 10,000)

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

Operating Acoustic Noise L wad sound power, 7.5 Bels

DD9400 storage capacity and configurations The following table provides storage capacity and configuration information for the DD9400 system.

Table 128. DD9400 storage capacity and configurations

Tier CPU-SP SKU Memory Front 2.5" SSDs Max. Useable Capacity

Cloud Tier Metadata

DD9400 Active Tier

16 core, 125 W 5218

576 GB (12 x 16 GB) + (12 x 32 GB)

5 (2.5%) 768TBu N/A

DD9400 with Cloud Tier 1

16 core, 125 W 5218

576 GB (12 x 16 GB) + (12 x 32 GB)

5 (2.5%) 1248TBu 240 TB raw/192 TB usable

1Cloud Tier can be added to a DD9400 and is enabled by a license and disk packs for the Cloud Tier metadata.

The Memory column lists the total memory that is required and the number and type of the DIMMs used. All memory DIMMs are DDR4 RDIMMs at the highest supported speed of 2666MT/s.

High Availability

DD9400 supports Active-Passive High Availability (A-P HA or just A-P). The following table summarizes the hardware changes to support A-P HA:

Table 129. HA configuration requirements

Hardware Change to support HA

Active-Passive HA

Additional memory No extra memory required.

HA private interconnect Cluster Interconnect : A-P requires the use of two ports from the on-board quad-port 10 GbE Network Daughter Card.

NVRAM A-P requires a single 16 GB NVRAM card (same as non-HA).

SAS Connectivity Both nodes of an A-P HA pair require redundant SAS connectivity to the storage array. (Note: a single node system also has redundant connectivity to the storage array.)

SSD Requirements SSDs are contained within FS25 and are available from both nodes.

HA Network Interconnect

The HA Network Interconnect, required for HA configurations, is a dedicated 10 GbE connection between the two nodes of an HA pair. The interconnect is used to write data (and metadata) from the active node's NVRAM to the passive node's NVRAM.

Two 10GbE links are used to meet the bandwidth requirements for the private interconnect. Traffic across the private interconnect has roughly the same bandwidth as is written to the NVRAM card. The dual 10-GbE links can move about 2 GB/s in each direction.

200 DD9400

HA SAS Interconnect

HA configurations require that the SSDs' cache drives be shared between both nodes and have redundant SAS connections to all shelves.

DD9400 front panel

Figure 116. DD9400 front panel

Table 130. Front panel features

Item Ports, panels, and slots Description

1 Left control panel Contains system health and system ID, status LED, and optional iDRAC Quick Sync 2 (wireless).

2 Drive slots Enable you to install drives that are supported on your system.

3 Right control panel Contains the power button, VGA port, iDRAC Direct micro USB port, and two USB 2.0 ports.

4 Information tag The Information tag is a slide-out label panel that contains system information such as Service Tag, NIC, MAC address, and so on. If you have opted for the secure default access to iDRAC, the Information tag also contains the iDRAC secure default password.

Table 131. Front LEDs

Name Color Purpose

Control Panel Status LED Blue/Amber Status: Healthy: Solid Blue Fault: Blink Amber Sys ID: Blink Blue

System Power Button/LED Green Indication that the system has power.

Drive activity LEDs Green Lit green when the drive is powered. Blinks during drive activity.

Drive service LEDs Green Lit solid amber when a disk drive needs service.

DD9400 201

Front LEDs

Figure 117. Front left control panel status LEDs

NOTE: The indicators display solid amber if any error occurs.

Table 132. System health and system ID indicator codes

System health and ID indicator code

Solid blue Indicates that the system is turned on, system is healthy, and system ID mode is not active. Press the system health and system ID button to switch to system ID mode.

Blinking blue Indicates that the system ID mode is active. Press the system health and system ID button to switch to system health mode.

Solid amber Indicates that the system is in fail-safe mode.

Blinking amber Indicates that the system is experiencing a fault. Check the System event log or the LCD panel, if available on the bezel, for specific error messages.

Figure 118. Front right control panel power button LEDs

202 DD9400

Table 133. Right control panel features

Item Indicator, button, or connector

Description

1 Power button Indicates if the system is turned on or off. Press the power button to manually turn on or off the system.

NOTE: Press the power button to gracefully shut down an ACPI-compliant operating system.

2 USB port (2) The USB ports are 4-pin, 2.0-compliant. These ports enable you to connect USB devices to the system.

3 iDRAC Direct port The iDRAC Direct port is micro USB 2.0-compliant. This port enables you to access the iDRAC Direct features.

4 iDRAC Direct LED The iDRAC Direct LED indicator lights up to indicate that the iDRAC Direct port is connected.

5 VGA port Enables you to connect a display device to the system.

Table 134. iDRAC Direct LED indicator codes

iDRAC Direct LED indicator code Condition

Solid green for two seconds Indicates that the laptop or tablet is connected.

Flashing green (on for two seconds and off for two seconds)

Indicates that the laptop or tablet that is connected is recognized.

Turns of Indicates that the laptop or tablet is unplugged.

Figure 119. Drive LEDs

The front contains 25 2.5" disk drive slots that can be populated with SSDs. Each SSD is housed in a drive carrier that contains two LEDs at the bottom of the carrier. The carrier's left blue LED is lit whenever an SSD is present in the slot, and it blinks when I/O activity is occurring on the disk. The right amber LED is usually off and lights amber to indicate that the disk is faulted and must be serviced.

DD9400 SSD usage and configurations

DD9400 system uses a 16 x 2.5" drive slot midplane. In addition to the operating system drives, it allows up to 12 SSD drives for metadata cache implementation.

DD9400 203

SSD configurations

The SSD slots on the front of the enclosure are shown below. The system come from the factory with SSDs populated in the enclosure.

Figure 120. DD9400 SSD slot assignment (single node configuration)

DD9400 supports 2.5% SSD option out of factory. Based on 3.84 TB SSD capacity, the required number of SSDs for each DD9400 configuration is provided in the following table.

Table 135. DD9400 SSD configurations

Configuration Single node HA

Cache SSDs 5 (internal) 3.84 TB 5 (External FS25) 3.84 TB

The cache SSDs are installed right to left starting from slot 15 down.

NOTE: For DD9400 HA configuration, the head unit will only have the four boot drives. It will not have the cache drives in

the head unit as shown in the above figure because the cache drives are in the FS25 data shelf.

SSD boot drives

Other SAS SSDs are used to boot the DD OS operating system. Boot disks and/or external disk shelves are used to log system information. Boot disks are installed from the other end of the front 2.5" disk slots to physically differentiate the cache SSDs.

Table 136. SSD boot drives

# of boot disks Installed in slots

Four 1.92TB SSDs 0,1,2,3

204 DD9400

Rear panel

Figure 121. System rear panel

Item Panels, ports, and slots Description

1 Full-height PCIe expansion card slot (3)

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 1) connects up to three full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

2 Half-height PCIe expansion card slot

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 2) connects one half-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

3 Rear handle The rear handle can be removed to enable any external cabling of PCIe cards that are installed in the PCIe expansion card slot 6.

4 Full-height PCIe expansion card slot (2)

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 2) connects up to two full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

5 Full-height PCIe expansion card slot (2)

The PCIe expansion card slot (riser 3) connects up to two full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

6 Power supply unit (2) Supports two AC power supply units (PSUs)

7 NIC ports The NIC ports that are integrated on the network daughter card (NDC) provide network connectivity.

8 USB port (2) The USB ports are 9-pin and 3.0-compliant. These ports enable you to connect USB devices to the system.

9 VGA port Enables you to connect a display device to the system.

10 Serial port Enables you to connect a serial device to the system.

11 iDRAC9 dedicated port Enables you to remotely access iDRAC.

12 System identification button The System Identification (ID) button is available on the front and back of the systems. Press the button to identify a system in a rack by turning on the system ID button. You can also use the system ID button to reset iDRAC and to access BIOS using the step through mode.

DD9400 205

Rear LEDs

Figure 122. Onboard ID and iDRAC LEDs

1. iDRAC management port: a. The green link LED on the left is lit whenever there is link at 1000BaseT and 100BaseT speeds. The link LED is off when

the link speed is 10BaseT or there is no link. b. The green link LED on the right blinks whenever there is traffic on the port.

2. System identification LED: This blue LED can be turned on by software to visually identify the system.

PSU FRU LEDs

There are two power supplies, one in the upper left of the rear chassis and one on the bottom right. Each power supply has three LEDs: AC good, DC good, and Service. The top PSU is "right-side up" and the bottom PSU is "upside down."

Table 137. PSU FRU LEDs

Name Color Definition

AC Good Green AC input is as expected.

DC Good Green DC output is as expected.

Service Amber PSU has a fault condition and a must be replaced.

PCIe HBAs

A slot in the chassis that does not contain an HBA must have a filler panel installed in the empty slots. This is required for EMI compliance.

This system supports nine I/O modules slots, seven of which are 8-lane PCIe Gen3, and two are 16-lane PCIe Gen3. Several networking, NVRAM, SAS, and Fibre Channel I/O modules are supported.

Slot assignment

The following table lists the DD9400 configuration slot assignments:

Table 138. DD9400 slot assignments

Description Slot

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GbE SFP+ PCIe, Full Height 5, 8, 1

206 DD9400

Table 138. DD9400 slot assignments (continued)

Description Slot

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GBASE-T PCIe, Full Height 5, 8, 1

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GBASE-T PCIe, Low Profile 6

QLogic, 41262 2 Port, 25Gb SFP28 PCIe, Full Height 5, 8, 1

QLogic, 41262 2 Port, 25Gb SFP28 PCIe, Low Profile 6

HBA330 SAS Controller, 12Gbps Mini card mini/mono

QAT,INTEL,8970,FH, Avnet p/n 1QA89701G1P5 4

PM8072,SAS12,4P,FH, MicroSemi 2295200-R 3, 7, 5

FC16,QLE2694-DEL-BK,TRG,QP,FH 5, 8, 1

16GB NVRAM,FH 2

Host Interface (x16) is 2-port 100 Gb QSFP+ Ethernet.

Host Interface (x8) are:

2-port 25 Gb SFP28 Ethernet 4-port 10 Gb SFP+ Ethernet 4-port 10GBaseT Ethernet 4-port 16 Gb Fibre Channel

External SAS is 4-port 12 Gb SAS card and is required for external storage for HA and Single Node configurations.

NVRAM is the 16GB NVRAM.

Internal SAS Mezzanine is 2-port 12 Gb Mini-SAS HD SAS controller mezzanine.

Host Network Interface Mezzanine is either:

4-port 10GBaseSR SFP+ Ethernet mezzanine 4-port 10GBaseT RJ45 Ethernet mezzanine

I/O population rules

The following figures show the I/O module slot numbers.

The slot labeled N is the network daughter card, which contains ports ethMa, ethMb, ethMc, and ethMd.

The physical interface name format for the other I/O module slots is ethXy, where X is the slot number and y is an alphanumeric character. For example, eth0a.

For most horizontal I/O module NIC interfaces, the port numbering goes from left to right, with ethXa on the left. The horizontal I/O module slots on the left-in slots 1-3 are inverted. The port numbering on these I/O modules in these slots goes from right to left, with ethXa on the right.

The management port ethMa is the first port set up by the Configuration Wizard. It is marked with a red rectangle in the figure below.

Figure 123. Slot numbering

The general population rules can be summarized as:

1. Populate a given I/O in the available slots listed. 2. Select the first available slot in the group. 3. Follow the steps for each I/O in the order specified.

DD9400 207

4. Slots 4 and 8 should be reserved for x16 cards unless there are no available x8 slots.

NOTE: Installing HBAs requires opening the system and installing the HBA into the riser.

Riser# Slots (from top to bottom)

1 1, 2, 3

2 4, 5, 6, N

3 7, 8

Gen3 PCIe

Slots support Gen3 PCIe.

I/O module servicing

All I/O modules are user serviceable and may be replaced when the system is powered off. On-line service of I/O modules is not support. A module that is hot-inserted into the system will remain powered off and will not be powered on until the next reboot of the system. A module that is hot-removed causes an operating system to immediately reboot.

DD9400 DIMM configurations

The SP Module contains two Intel SP processors each with an integrated memory controller that supports six channels of DDR4 memory. The CPU allows two DIMM slots per channel, so the SP Module supports 24 DIMM slots.

Each DDR4 DIMM is connected to the system board through an industry standard 288-pin DDR4 DIMM connector. This system uses registered DIMMs with Dell EMC ControlCenter at 72 bits wide (64-bits data + 8-bits Dell EMC ControlCenter) up to a maximum of 2666MT/s speed.

Table 139. Memory configurations

Tier Total Memory Memory DIMM Configuration

DD9400 Active Tier 576 GB 12 x 32 GB + 12 x 16 GB

DD9400 Cloud Tier 576 GB 12 x 32 GB + 12 x 16 GB

Memory locations

To ensure maximum memory performance, there are memory DIMM population rules so that the memory loading and interleaving are optimal. The following table specifies the DIMM location rules. Each DIMM location contains a 16GB DIMM or a 32GB DIMM.

Table 140. DD9400 DIMM configuration CPU 1

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

A6 A12 A5 A11 A4 A10 A7 A1 A8 A2 A9 A3

288 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

Table 141. DD9400 DIMM configuration CPU 2

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

B6 B12 B5 B11 B4 B10 B7 B1 B8 B2 B9 B3

288 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

208 DD9400

DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities

DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 do not store data on internal disk drives and rely on external disk array shelves to provide storage. DS60 disk shelves and ES40 shelves are connected to systems using 12 Gb Mini-SAS HD ports, which are implemented on the SAS HBAs.

The systems also support external metadata storage (cache) shelf FS25. External cache shelf only hosts DD OS depended metadata for performance acceleration.

The ES40 SAS shelf contains 15 drives, which includes 12 drives of usable storage, two parity drives, and one hot spare.

The DS60 shelf contains 60 drives. Drives are configured in four groups of 15 drives. Each group contains two parity drives and one hot spare, so each group provides 12 drives of usable storage. A fully configured DS60 shelf provides 48 drives of usable storage.

Table 142. Shelves shipped from factory, in rack

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB ES40 8 TB DS60 8 TB DS60

Table 143. Shelves shipped from factory, boxed

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB ES40 8 TB ES40 8 TB ES40

4 TB DS60 8 TB DS60 8 TB DS60

Table 144. Additional shelves supported

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB SAS ES30/DS60 4 TB SAS ES30/DS60 4 TB SAS ES30/DS60

3 TB SAS ES30/DS60 3 TB SAS ES30/DS60 3 TB SAS ES30/DS60

NOTE: 3 TB shelves are only support on controller upgrades and not on fresh installs.

Table 145. Shelf usable capacities

Hard drive size (TB) Shelf Useable TB

4 ES40 48

4 DS60 192

8 DS60 384

The following table lists the maximum number of shelves per chain:

Table 146. Supported shelf count per chain

Shelf type Max # from factory Max # per chain

SAS ES30/ES40 4 7

DS60 2 3

DS60 + ES30/ES40 n/a 5

F25 1 1

The connector type for ES30 is Mini-SAS. Special cables may be necessary when combining ES30 and ES40 shelves on the same chain (enabled but not recommended).

DD9400 and DD9900 system capacities are optimized for use with DS60 shelves containing 8 TB drives. DS60 shelves can be populated with one to four packs of fifteen 8 TB, or 4 TB drives. Different 4 TB and 8 TB capacity disk packs may be mixed

DD9400 209

within a single DS60 shelf. ES40 SAS shelves and DS60 shelves of mixed capacities may be attached so long as the maximum storage capacity of the system is not exceeded.

210 DD9400

DD9500 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

System features System specifications DD9500 storage capacity Front panel Rear panel I/O module slot assignments Internal System Components DD9500 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD9500 and DS60 shelf guidelines

11

DD9500 211

System features Table 147. DD9500 system features

Feature DD9500 (Base configuration)

DD9500 (Expanded configuration)

Rack height 4U, supported in four-post racks only

4U, supported in four-post racks only

Rack mounting Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.976.2 cm).

Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.976.2 cm).

Power 4 hot-swappable power units, 2 pairs of 1 +1 redundant

4 hot-swappable power units, 2 pairs of 1 +1 redundant

Voltage 200240 V~. Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz.

200240 V~. Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz.

Processor 4 Intel EX processors. 4 Intel EX processors.

NVRAM One 8-GB NVRAM module for data integrity during a power outage

One 8-GB NVRAM module for data integrity during a power outage

Fans 8 hot-swappable fans, redundant

8 hot-swappable fans, redundant

Memory 32 x 8 GB DIMM (256 GB) 32 x 8 GB DIMM + 16 x 16 GB DIMM (512 GB)

Internal drives 4 x 400 GB (base 10) hot-swappable solid state drives (SSD)

4 x 400 GB (base 10) hot-swappable solid state drives (SSD)

I/O module slots 11 I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots. Replaceable I/O modules are not hot-swappable. See I/ O module slot assignments on page 223

11 I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots. Replaceable I/O modules are not hot-swappable. See I/ O module slot assignments on page 223

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 540 TB 1080 TB

DD Cloud Tier N/A 2160 TBa

Extended retention N/A 1080 TBb

High availability support Yes Yes

HA private interconnect 4 10 GbE optical ports 4 10 GbE optical ports

External SSD shelf Optional 1 x 8 drive SSD shelf

Optional 1 x 15 drive SSD shelf

a. DD Cloud Tier requires five ES30 shelves fully populated with 4 TB drives to store DD Cloud Tier metadata. b. Extended retention not available on HA configurations

212 DD9500

System specifications Table 148. DD9500/DD9800 system specifications

Model Watts BTU/hr Power (VA) Weight Width Depth Height

DD9500/ DD9800

1887 6444 1981 117 lb / 53.2 kg

19 in / 48.3 cm

29.5 in / 74.9 cm

7 in / 17.8 cm

Operating temperature: 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet Operating humidity: 20% to 80%, non-condensing Non-operating temperature: -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C) Operating acoustic noise: Sound power, LWAd, is 7.7 bels.

DD9500 213

DD9500 storage capacity The table lists the capacities of the systems. The internal indexes and other product components use variable amounts of storage, depending on the type of data and the sizes of files. If you send different datasets to otherwise identical systems, one system may, over time, have room for more or less actual backup data than another.

NOTE: The system commands compute and display amounts of disk space or data as decimal multiples of certain powers

of two (210, 220, 230, and so forth). For example, 7 GiB of disk space = 7 x 230 bytes = 7 x 1,073,741,824 bytes. The system

sees this process as Base 2 calculation.

Table 149. DD9500 storage capacity

System/Installed Memory

Internal Disks Raw Storage (Base 10)

Data Storage Space (Base 2 Calculation)

Data Storage Space (Base 10 Calculation)

DD9500

(3 SAS I/O modules)

256 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

540 TB (external) 392.9 TiB 432 TB

DD9500

(3 SAS I/O modules)

512 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

1,080 TB (external) 786.8 TiB 864 TB

DD9500 with DD Cloud Tier software

(4 SAS I/O modules)

512 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

3,240 TB (external) 2360.4 TiB 2592 TB

DD9500 with Extended Retention (ER) software

(4 SAS I/O modules)

512 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

2,160 TB (external) 1573.6 TiB 1728 TB

Table 150. DD9500 with ES30 SAS shelves

DD9500 DD9500

Memory (GB) 256 512

SAS I/O modules x ports per module 3x4 3x4

ES30 support (TB) SAS 30, 45, 60 SAS 30, 45, 60

Maximum shelves per set 5 5

Maximum number of sets 6 6

NOTE: ES30 SATA shelves are supported when upgrading from an older single node system, but are not supported with HA

pairs or new installations.

Table 151. DD9500 with DS60 shelves

DD9500 DD9500

Memory (GB) 256 512

SAS I/O modules x ports per module 3x4 3x4

DS60 support (TB) SAS 45, 60 SAS 45, 60

Maximum shelves per set 4 4

Maximum number of sets 6 6

214 DD9500

Front panel The four solid state drives (SSDs), the storage processor (SP), and the fans are accessed from the front of the system. The SP must be pulled out to provide access to the DIMMs. The fans are accessed without pulling or removing the SP and they are hot-swappable. The photo shows the interfaces on the front of the system.

Figure 124. Front panel components

1. SSD slot 0 2. SSD slot 1 3. SSD slot 2 4. SSD slot 3 5. Front LEDs 6. USB ports 7. Power button 8. Fan tray thumbscrew (left) 9. SP module thumbscrew to secure the ejector handle 10. Fan tray thumbscrew (right)

Front LED indicators

On the front panel to the right of SSD #4 (in Slot 3) are 3 LEDs that show high level system status. The System Power LED glows blue to show the system is powered on.

NOTE: The system can have power (be plugged in) but the blue LEDs are off if the system is powered off.

The SP Service LED is normally off, but glows amber whenever the storage processor (SP) requires service. The Enclosure Service LED is normally off, but glows amber whenever the SP or other replaceable parts require service. The System Power and Enclosure Service LEDs are visible through the front bezel.

DD9500 215

Figure 125. Service LEDs

1. SP service LED Amber light indicates that the SP or one of its components needs service. 2. Enclosure Service LED This is normally off, but amber light indicates that the enclosure or something within the enclosure the fans, SP, I/O modules, management module etcrequires service. 3. System power LED Blue light indicates system running

216 DD9500

The power button shown in the picture is used when a system needs to be powered up after a shut down using the system poweroff command. Once power is restored the system power LED light turns blue.

Figure 126. Power button

1. System power LED Blue light indicates system running 2. Power button

The LEDs in the front are shown in the following figure.

Figure 127. Front LEDs

1. SSD LED in slot 0 2. SSD LED in slot 1 3. SSD LED in slot 2 4. SSD LED in slot 3 5. System power LED Blue light indicates system running

DD9500 217

Table 152. Front panel LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

System, SP fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates failure.

System, chassis fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates a fault condition.

SSD Top LED Solid blue, disk ready, blinks while busy.

SSD Bottom LED Dark indicates healthy. Solid amber indicates disk fail.

Solid-state drives

A system contains 4 hot-swappable 2.5 in. 400 GB solid-state drives (SSD) located in the front. There are four drive bays numbered 03 from left to right. A dual drive failure allows the system to operate without disruption.

Each drive has a blue colored power LED and an amber fault LED.

Figure 128. SSD drives

1. Slot 0 2. Slot 1 3. Slot 2 4. Slot 3

218 DD9500

Rear panel In the rear of the system, the top section contains the 4 power supply units. In the middle of the section, on the left, is serial number tag location. To the right of the serial number tag location is the management module. The lower section contains the NVRAM and the I/O modules numbered 0 through 11 from left to right. The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the rear of the system.

Figure 129. Features on rear of chassis

1. Power supply units 2. Serial number tag 3. Management module 4. NVRAM and I/O modules (slots 0-11)

The figure shows the location of the serial number tag on the left of the management module.

Figure 130. Serial number tag location

Power supply units

A DD9500/DD9800 system has four power supply units, numbered PSU0, PSU1, PSU2, and PSU3 from left to right. Each power supply has its own integral cooling fan.

NOTE: The DD9500/DD9800 system should be powered from redundant AC sources. This allows one AC source to fail or

be serviced without impacting system operation. PSU0 and PSU1 should be attached to one AC source. PSU2 and PSU3

should be attached to the other AC source.

DD9500 219

The AC power plugs are located to the right of each power supply. The wire clips for the AC cords hold the cords in place. The wire clips must be disengaged before disconnecting the AC power to each power supply.

Figure 131. Four power supplies

Management module

The following figure shows the location of the management module on the rear of the system and identifies the interfaces.

Figure 132. Management module

1. Left blue thumbscrew to loosen the management module 2. 4 x 1000BaseT Ethernet ports (For details, see the picture - 1000BaseT Ethernet ports) 3. Service network port (IPMI, 1000BaseT Ethernet port) 4. Service LED 5. VGA port 6. Serial port 7. Four USB ports 8. Right blue thumbscrew to loosen the management module

220 DD9500

Figure 133. 1000BaseT Ethernet ports

- Lower left port: physical #0, logical ethMa - Top left port: physical #1, logical ethMb - Lower right port: physical #2, logical ethMc - Top right port: physical #3, logical ethMd

Rear LED indicators

The rear elements containing LEDs include each power supply, each I/O module, and the management module.

The figure shows the rear LEDS.

Figure 134. Rear LEDs

1. Management module service LEDs 2. Power supply LEDs 3. NVRAM LEDs 4. I/O Module LEDs

The power supply LEDs include:

AC LED on top DC LED in the middle Service Required LED on the bottom

Figure 135. Power supply LEDs

DD9500 221

Table 153. Rear LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

Power supply AC LED Steady green indicates normal AC input power.

Power supply DC LED Steady green indicates normal DC output power.

Power supply Service LED Solid amber indicates a failed power supply.

I/O module I/O module handle Solid green means I/O module functioning normally. Amber indicates a fault condition. Each I/O module also has per port LEDs. These LEDs are blue on the FC, and SAS I/O modules. They light when the port is active.

Management module Bicolor LED Solid green means management module functioning normally. Amber indicates that the management module requires service.

Available I/O modules

I/O modules may include:

Quad port Ethernet 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors Quad port Ethernet 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad port Ethernet 10GBase-T Copper Dual port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel Quad port 6 Gbps SAS

I/O module port physical mapping

I/O module ports are numbered starting with 0. When the I/O modules are inserted vertically into the system chassis, port 0 is on the bottom.

I/O module port logical mapping

The numerical port labels on the I/O modules are identified logically in the DD OS software by the following descriptions:

I/O module type I/O module slot

222 DD9500

Alphabetic character corresponding to the physical port number

The following example is based on a four-port Ethernet I/O module installed in slot 1 of the system chassis.

Table 154. Physical to logical port mapping example

Physical port Logical identifier

0 eth1a

1 eth1b

2 eth1c

3 eth1d

Ethernet I/O module options

The available Ethernet I/O modules are:

Dual Port 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors Dual Port 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad Port 1000Base-T Copper with RJ-45 connectors Quad port 2 port 1000Base-T Copper (RJ45) /2 port 1000Base-SR Optical

Fibre Channel I/O modules

A Fibre Channel (FC) I/O module is a dual-port Fibre Channel module. Up to four FC I/O modules may be installed. The optional virtual tape library (VTL) feature requires at least one FC I/O module. Boost over Fibre Channel is an optional feature and requires at least one FC I/O module. A maximum of four FC I/O modules may be installed in a system using either VTL or the Boost protocol or a combination of both protocols.

SAS I/O modules

DD9500 systems have three quad-port SAS I/O modules installed in slots 2, 3 and 6. Systems configured with DD Extended Retention (ER) or DD Cloud Tier software options require an additional SAS I/O module in slot 9.

I/O module slot assignments The following figure shows the location of the NVRAM and I/O modules.

Figure 136. Location of NVRAM and I/O modules

DD9500 223

1. NVRAM moduleslot 0 2. I/O modulesslots 1 to 11 (See the I/O module slot assignments table.)

The table shows the I/O module slot assignments for the DD9500 system. Each type of I/O module is restricted to certain slots.

Table 155. DD9500 I/O module slot assignments

Slot Base configuration HA ER or DD Cloud Tier DD Cloud Tier and HA

0 NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM

1 Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

2 SAS SAS SAS SAS

3 SAS SAS SAS SAS

4 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

5 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

6 SAS SAS SAS SAS

7 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

8 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

9 Not available (contains a filler)

Not available (contains a filler)

SAS SAS

10 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

11 FC, Ethernet or empty

10 Gb optical Ethernet for interconnect between the primary and standby nodes in the HA pair.

FC, Ethernet or empty 10 Gb optical Ethernet for interconnect between the primary and standby nodes in the HA pair.

Slot addition rules

This system has 12 slots for I/O modules. Slots 0, 2, 3, 6, 9, and 11 are reserved for mandatory I/O modules. Slots 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, and 10 support optional host interface I/O modules. The maximum supported number of any type of host interface (Ethernet or FC) I/O module is four.

NOTE: The maximum number of host interface I/O modules that are listed above does not include the 10 GbE Optical

I/O module for the HA interconnect. The HA interconnect is a fifth Ethernet module, but it is reserved for communication

between the two nodes of an HA pair, and is not available for host connections.

The maximum number of I/O modules, including both mandatory and optional I/O modules, supported in a system varies by configuration: Single node: 10 HA: 10 DD Extended Retention: 10 DD Cloud Tier: 10 HA + DD Cloud Tier: 11

Three I/O module slots are tied to each CPU in the system. When installing I/O modules, balance the load across the CPUs. The following table shows the CPU to slot mappings.

CPU I/O module slots

0 0, 1, 2

224 DD9500

CPU I/O module slots

1 3, 4, 5

2 6, 7, 8

3 9, 10, 11

The following table assigns rules for populating the I/O modules.

Table 156. I/O module slot population rules

Step I/O module type Slots Notes

1: Populate mandatory I/O modules

NVRAM 0

Quad Port SAS 2

Quad Port SAS 3

Quad Port SAS 6

Quad Port SAS 9 This slot remains empty if the system does not use DD Cloud Tier or DD Extended Retention.

Quad Port 10GbE Optical 11 This slot remains empty if the system does not use HA.

2: Populate host interface I/O modules

Quad Port 10GbE SR Quad Port 10 GBase-T Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre

Channel

1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10 Install host interface I/O modules in the remaining slots. Install the I/O modules to balance the load across the CPUs. Do not place two Ethernet or two FC I/O modules on one CPU.a

a. HA systems are the exception to this guidance, as a Quad Port 10GbE SR I or Quad Port 10 GBase-T /O module can be added in slot 10 alongside the HA interconnect I/O module in slot 11.

Internal System Components The storage processor (SP) is a subassembly within the chassis that contains the memory risers with the DIMMs and a fan tray with fan modules. The SP module also contains the 4 CPUs, which cannot be removed or replaced.

The memory risers tray, which contains 8 memory risers with DIMMs, can be accessed from the front of the SP module. The memory risers are not hot swappable

The fan tray, which contains 8 fan modules, can be accessed from the front of the SP module. The fans are hot swappable.

The DIMMS can be accessed by pulling the entire SP module away from the chassis. Depending on the model, there are DIMMs totaling:

256 GB or 512 GB for a DD9500 system. 256 GB or 768 GB for a DD9800 system.

The figures show the location of the SP module, the DIMM risers accessed from a partly removed SP module, and the fan tray partly removed.

Do not lift the DD9500/DD9800 system, or the storage processor (SP) module, or any modules by the handle. The handle is not designed to support the weight of the populated shelf. Also do not carry the DD9500/DD9800 system or the SP by the handle. The handles are only intended to be used to insert or remove the SP module.

DD9500 225

Figure 137. SP module

Figure 138. Releasing a memory riser

1. Left riser card ejector handle 2. Release button 3. Right riser card ejector handle

226 DD9500

Figure 139. Open fan tray

NOTE: Do not loosen the blue thumbscrew on the SP latch handle to access the fan tray. Use the orange thumbscrews on

the front as shown in the picture.

1. Left fan tray thumbscrew 2. Front panel left handle 3. Front panel right handle 4. Right fan tray thumbscrew 5. Location map of the fans

DIMM modules

The DD9500 system contains the following memory configurations:

Table 157. DD9500 memory configurations

System Base Expanded ER/DD Cloud Tier

DD9500 32 x 8 GB DIMMs (256 GB) 32 x 8 GB DIMMs + 16 x 16 GB DIMMs (512 GB)

32 x 8 GB DIMMs + 16 x 16 GB DIMMs (512 GB)

Cooling fans

A system contains eight hot-swappable cooling fans in a 7+1 redundant configuration, which is located in the front of the system within a movable fan tray. The fans provide cooling for the processors, DIMMs, and I/O modules. Each fan has an LED which glows amber when the fan is failed or faulted. A system can run with one fan faulted.

DD9500 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity.

DD9500 227

DD9500 systems support ES30 SATA shelves after controller upgrades from older models. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

Table 158. DD9500 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD9500 256 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

53 6 432 540

DD9500 512 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

53 6 864 1080

DD9500 ER 4, 5 512 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 8 1728 2160

DD9500 HA6, 7 256 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

53 6 432 540

DD9500 HA6, 7 512 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

53 6 864 1080

DD9500 w/ Cloud Tier

512 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 8 864 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1080 (max), additional 300 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

DD9500 w/ HA and Cloud Tier

512 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

7 8 864 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1080 (max), additional 300 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

4. 5 shelves maximum with ES30, 4 is the recommended maximum. 4 shelves maximum with ES20, 3 is the recommended maximum.

5. The maximum shelf count for any specific drive/shelf size might be less than the product of max shelves x max shelves per set.

6. There is no support for ERSO on HA systems.

7. There is no support for HA with SATA drives.

Types of cabinets and power connections

The ES30 chassis is installed in two types of racks: 40U-C (existing racks) and the 40U-P (newer racks). The racks use one phase or 3-phase power connections.

3-Phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks that are used for several systems. In those situations, it is desirable to balance the current draw across all three phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration depends on the specific installation.

228 DD9500

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

DD9500 and cabling

NOTE: If a system installation does not follow ALL of these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum of four is preferred). You can have seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier

configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 159. Minimum and maximum configurations

System DD9500 DD9500 w/

Appliance 864 TB usable 864 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Minimum appliance shelf count

4 4 4

Maximum appliance shelf count

30 30 30

Extended Retention systems (ER)

1728 TB usable 2016 TB usable 2016 TB usable

Maximum shelves for ER 56 56 56

High Availability systems (HA)

864 TB usable 1008 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Maximum shelves for HA 42 42 47

Cloud Tier systems 1104 TB usable 1248 TB usable 1248 TB usable

Maximum shelves for Cloud Tier

42 42 47

The DD9500 base (non-Extended Retention) and HA systems supports six chains.

The following figures show cabling for base systems, HA systems, and systems with the Extended Retention software option.

DD9500 229

NOTE: The racks are filled from bottom up.

DD9500 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5.

Table 160. DD9500 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD9500 256 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 432 540

DD9500 Expanded 512 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 864 1080

DD9500 ER 512 4x4 SAS 45, 60 4 8 1728 2160

DD9500 HA 2 512 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 864 1080

DD9500 Cloud Tier 3,4

512 4x4 SAS 45, 60 4 8 864 + 240 for Cloud Tier

1080 + 300 for Cloud Tier

DD9500 Cloud Tier w/ HA 3,4

512 4x4 SAS 45, 60 4 8 864 + 240 for Cloud Tier

1080 + 300 for Cloud Tier

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. DD9300 base support 2.5 DS60-4 180 x 2 plus DS60-2 90, if a half-filled DS60 is necessary.

3. DD9300 Expanded supports five DS60 maximum.

4. There is no support for HA with SATA drives.

3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks used for several systems. In those situations it is desirable to balance the current draw across all 3 phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration is dependent on the specific installation.

DD9500 and DD9800 cabling

NOTE: If a system installation does not follow ALL of these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table.

230 DD9500

You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum of four is preferred). You can have seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier

configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 161. Minimum and maximum configurations

System DD9500 DD9500 w/

Appliance 864 TB usable 864 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Minimum appliance shelf count

4 4 4

Maximum appliance shelf count

30 30 30

Extended Retention systems (ER)

1728 TB usable 2016 TB usable 2016 TB usable

Maximum shelves for ER 56 56 56

High Availability systems (HA)

864 TB usable 1008 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Maximum shelves for HA 42 42 47

Cloud Tier systems 1104 TB usable 1248 TB usable 1248 TB usable

Maximum shelves for Cloud Tier

42 42 47

The DD9500 base (non-Extended Retention) and HA systems supports six chains.

The following figures show cabling for base systems, HA systems, and systems with the Extended Retention software option.

NOTE: The racks are filled from bottom up.

DD9500 231

DD9800 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD9800 system features DD9800 system specifications DD9800 storage capacity DD9800 front panel Rear panel I/O module slot assignments Internal system components DD9800 and ES30 shelf guidelines DD9800 and DS60 shelf guidelines

12

232 DD9800

DD9800 system features Table 162. DD9800 system features

Feature DD9800 (Base configuration)

DD9800 (Expanded configuration)

Rack height 4U, supported in four-post racks only

4U, supported in four-post racks only

Rack mounting Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.976.2 cm).

Rack mount kit included with each system. Adjustable between 24 - 36 in. (60.976.2 cm).

Power 4 hot-swappable power units, 2 pairs of 1 +1 redundant

4 hot-swappable power units, 2 pairs of 1 +1 redundant

Voltage 200240 V~. Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz.

200240 V~. Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz.

Processor 4 Intel EX processors. 4 Intel EX processors.

NVRAM One 8-GB NVRAM module for data integrity during a power outage

One 8-GB NVRAM module for data integrity during a power outage

Fans 8 hot-swappable fans, redundant

8 hot-swappable fans, redundant

Memory 32 x 8 GB DIMM (256 GB) 32 x 8 GB DIMM + 32 x 16 GB DIMM (768 GB)

Internal drives 4 x 400 GB (base 10) hot-swappable solid state drives (SSD)

4 x 400 GB (base 10) hot-swappable solid state drives (SSD)

I/O module slots 11 I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots. Replaceable I/O modules are not hot-swappable. See I/ O module slot assignments on page 244

11 I/O module (Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and SAS) slots. Replaceable I/O modules are not hot-swappable. See I/ O module slot assignments on page 244

Supported capacity Non-extended retention 630 TB 1260 TB

DD Cloud Tier N/A 2520 TB a

Extended retention N/A 1260 TB b

High availability support Yes Yes

HA private interconnect 4 10 GbE optical ports 4 10 GbE optical ports

External SSD shelf 1 x 8 drive SSD shelf 1 x 15 drive SSD shelf

a. DD Cloud Tier requires five ES30 shelves fully populated with 4 TB drives to store DD Cloud Tier metadata. b. Extended retention not available on HA configurations

DD9800 233

DD9800 system specifications Table 163. DD9800 system specifications

Model Watts BTU/hr Power (VA) Weight Width Depth Height

DD9800 1887 6444 1981 117 lb / 53.2 kg

19 in / 48.3 cm

29.5 in / 74.9 cm

7 in / 17.8 cm

Operating temperature: 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet Operating humidity: 20% to 80%, non-condensing Non-operating temperature: -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C) Operating acoustic noise: Sound power, LWAd, is 7.7 bels.

234 DD9800

DD9800 storage capacity The table lists the capacities of the systems. The nternal indexes and other product components use variable amounts of storage, depending on the type of data and the sizes of files. If you send different datasets to otherwise identical systems, one system may, over time, have room for more or less actual backup data than another.

NOTE: System commands compute and display amounts of disk space or data as decimal multiples of certain powers of two

(210, 220, 230, and so forth). For example, 7 GB of disk space = 7 x 230 bytes = 7 x 1,073,741,824 bytes. The system sees this

process as Base 2 calculation.

Table 164. DD9800 storage capacity

System/ Installed Memory

Internal Disks Raw Storage (Base 10)

Data Storage Space (Base 2 Calculation)

Data Storage Space (Base 10 Calculation)

DD9800

(3 SAS I/O modules)

256 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

630 TB (external) 457.8 TiB 504 TB

DD9800

(3 SAS I/O modules)

768 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

1,260 TB (external) 915.6 TiB 1,008 TB

DD9800 with DD Cloud Tier

(4 SAS I/O modules)

768 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

3,780 TB (external) 2746.8 TiB 3.024 TB

DD9800 with ER

(4 SAS I/O modules)

768 GB

2.5 in.; 4 x 400 GB SATA SSD

No User Data

2,520 TB (external) 1,831.2 TiB 2,016 TB

Table 165. DD9800 with ES30 SAS shelves

DD9800 DD9800

Memory (GB) 256 768

SAS I/O modules x ports per module 3x4 3x4

ES30 support (TB) SAS 30, 45, 60 SAS 30, 45, 60

Maximum shelves per set 5 5

Maximum number of sets 6 6

NOTE: ES30 SATA shelves are supported when upgrading from an older single node system, but are not supported with HA

pairs or new installations.

Table 166. DD9800 with DS60 shelves

DD9800 DD9800

Memory (GB) 256 768

SAS I/O modules x ports per module 3x4 3x4

DS60 support (TB) SAS 45, 60 SAS 45, 60

Maximum shelves per set 4 4

Maximum number of sets 6 6

DD9800 235

DD9800 front panel The four solid state drives (SSDs), the storage processor (SP), and the fans are accessed from the front of the system. The SP must be pulled out to provide access to the DIMMs. The fans are accessed without pulling or removing the SP and they are hot-swappable. The photo shows the interfaces on the front of the system.

Figure 140. Front panel components

1. SSD slot 0 2. SSD slot 1 3. SSD slot 2 4. SSD slot 3 5. Front LEDs 6. USB ports 7. Power button 8. Fan tray thumbscrew (left) 9. SP module thumbscrew to secure the ejector handle 10. Fan tray thumbscrew (right)

Front LED indicators

On the front panel to the right of SSD #4 (in Slot 3) are 3 LEDs that show high level system status. The System Power LED glows blue to show the system is powered on.

NOTE: The system can have power (be plugged in) but the blue LEDs are off if the system is powered off.

The SP Service LED is normally off, but glows amber whenever the storage processor (SP) requires service. The Enclosure Service LED is normally off, but glows amber whenever the SP or other replaceable parts require service. The System Power and Enclosure Service LEDs are visible through the front bezel.

236 DD9800

Figure 141. Service LEDs

1. SP service LED Amber light indicates that the SP or one of its components needs service. 2. Enclosure Service LED This is normally off, but amber light indicates that the enclosure or something within the enclosure the fans, SP, I/O modules, management module etcrequires service. 3. System power LED Blue light indicates system running

DD9800 237

The power button shown in the picture is used when a system needs to be powered up after a shut down using the system poweroff command. Once power is restored the system power LED light turns blue.

Figure 142. Power button

1. System power LED Blue light indicates system running 2. Power button

The LEDs in the front are shown in the following figure.

Figure 143. Front LEDs

1. SSD LED in slot 0 2. SSD LED in slot 1 3. SSD LED in slot 2 4. SSD LED in slot 3 5. System power LED Blue light indicates system running

238 DD9800

Table 167. Front panel LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

System, SP fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates failure.

System, chassis fault Exclamation point within a triangle Dark indicates normal operation. Amber indicates a fault condition.

SSD Top LED Solid blue, disk ready, blinks while busy.

SSD Bottom LED Dark indicates healthy. Solid amber indicates disk fail.

Solid-state drives

A system contains 4 hot-swappable 2.5 in. 400 GB solid-state drives (SSD) located in the front. There are four drive bays numbered 03 from left to right. A dual drive failure allows the system to operate without disruption.

Each drive has a blue colored power LED and an amber fault LED.

Figure 144. SSD drives

1. Slot 0 2. Slot 1 3. Slot 2 4. Slot 3

DD9800 239

Rear panel In the rear of the system, the top section contains the 4 power supply units. In the middle of the section, on the left, is serial number tag location. To the right of the serial number tag location is the management module. The lower section contains the NVRAM and the I/O modules numbered 0 through 11 from left to right. The photo shows the hardware features and interfaces on the rear of the system.

Figure 145. Features on rear of chassis

1. Power supply units 2. Serial number tag 3. Management module 4. NVRAM and I/O modules (slots 0-11)

The figure shows the location of the serial number tag on the left of the management module.

Figure 146. Serial number tag location

Power supply units

A DD9800 system has four power supply units, numbered PSU0, PSU1, PSU2, and PSU3 from left to right. Each power supply has its own integral cooling fan.

NOTE: The DD9800 system should be powered from redundant AC sources. This allows one AC source to fail or be

serviced without impacting system operation. PSU0 and PSU1 should be attached to one AC source. PSU2 and PSU3 should

be attached to the other AC source.

240 DD9800

The AC power plugs are located to the right of each power supply. The wire clips for the AC cords hold the cords in place. The wire clips must be disengaged before disconnecting the AC power to each power supply.

Figure 147. Four power supplies

Management module

The following figure shows the location of the management module on the rear of the system and identifies the interfaces.

Figure 148. Management module

1. Left blue thumbscrew to loosen the management module 2. 4 x 1000BaseT Ethernet ports (For details, see the picture - 1000BaseT Ethernet ports) 3. Service network port (IPMI, 1000BaseT Ethernet port) 4. Service LED 5. VGA port 6. Serial port 7. Four USB ports 8. Right blue thumbscrew to loosen the management module

DD9800 241

Figure 149. 1000BaseT Ethernet ports

- Lower left port: physical #0, logical ethMa - Top left port: physical #1, logical ethMb - Lower right port: physical #2, logical ethMc - Top right port: physical #3, logical ethMd

Rear LED indicators

The rear elements containing LEDs include each power supply, each I/O module, and the management module.

The figure shows the rear LEDS.

Figure 150. Rear LEDs

1. Management module service LEDs 2. Power supply LEDs 3. NVRAM LEDs 4. I/O Module LEDs

The power supply LEDs include:

AC LED on top DC LED in the middle Service Required LED on the bottom

Figure 151. Power supply LEDs

242 DD9800

Table 168. Rear LED status indicators

Part Description or Location State

Power supply AC LED Steady green indicates normal AC input power.

Power supply DC LED Steady green indicates normal DC output power.

Power supply Service LED Solid amber indicates a failed power supply.

I/O module I/O module handle Solid green means I/O module functioning normally. Amber indicates a fault condition. Each I/O module also has per port LEDs. These LEDs are blue on the FC, and SAS I/O modules. They light when the port is active.

Management module Bicolor LED Solid green means management module functioning normally. Amber indicates that the management module requires service.

Available I/O modules

I/O modules may include:

Quad port Ethernet 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors Quad port Ethernet 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad port Ethernet 10GBase-T Copper Dual port 16 Gbps Fibre Channel Quad port 6 Gbps SAS

I/O module port physical mapping

I/O module ports are numbered starting with 0. When the I/O modules are inserted vertically into the system chassis, port 0 is on the bottom.

I/O module port logical mapping

The numerical port labels on the I/O modules are identified logically in the DD OS software by the following descriptions:

I/O module type I/O module slot

DD9800 243

Alphabetic character corresponding to the physical port number

The following example is based on a four-port Ethernet I/O module installed in slot 1 of the system chassis.

Table 169. Physical to logical port mapping example

Physical port Logical identifier

0 eth1a

1 eth1b

2 eth1c

3 eth1d

Ethernet I/O module options

The available Ethernet I/O modules are:

Dual Port 10GBase-SR Optical with LC connectors Dual Port 10GBase-CX1 Direct Attach Copper with SPF+ module Quad Port 1000Base-T Copper with RJ-45 connectors Quad port 2 port 1000Base-T Copper (RJ45) /2 port 1000Base-SR Optical

Fibre Channel I/O modules

A Fibre Channel (FC) I/O module is a dual-port Fibre Channel module. Up to four FC I/O modules may be installed. The optional virtual tape library (VTL) feature requires at least one FC I/O module. Boost over Fibre Channel is an optional feature and requires at least one FC I/O module. A maximum of four FC I/O modules may be installed in a system using either VTL or the Boost protocol or a combination of both protocols.

SAS I/O modules

DD9800 systems have three quad-port SAS I/O modules installed in slots 2, 3 and 6. Systems configured with DD Extended Retention (ER) or DD Cloud Tier software options require an additional SAS I/O module in slot 9.

I/O module slot assignments The following figure shows the location of the NVRAM and I/O modules.

Figure 152. Location of NVRAM and I/O modules

244 DD9800

1. NVRAM moduleslot 0 2. I/O modulesslots 1 to 11 (See the I/O module slot assignments table.)

The table shows the I/O module slot assignments for the DD9800 system. Each type of I/O module is restricted to certain slots.

Table 170. DD9800 I/O module slot assignments

Slot Base configuration HA ER or DD Cloud Tier DD Cloud Tier and HA

0 NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM NVRAM

1 Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

Fibre Channel (FC), Ethernet or empty

2 SAS SAS SAS SAS

3 SAS SAS SAS SAS

4 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

5 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

6 SAS SAS SAS SAS

7 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

8 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

9 Not available (contains a filler)

Not available (contains a filler)

SAS SAS

10 FC, Ethernet or empty

FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty FC, Ethernet or empty

11 FC, Ethernet or empty

10 Gb optical Ethernet for interconnect between the primary and standby nodes in the HA pair.

FC, Ethernet or empty 10 Gb optical Ethernet for interconnect between the primary and standby nodes in the HA pair.

Slot addition rules

This system has 12 slots for I/O modules. Slots 0, 2, 3, 6, 9, and 11 are reserved for mandatory I/O modules. Slots 1, 4, 5, 7, 8, and 10 support optional host interface I/O modules. The maximum supported number of any type of host interface (Ethernet or FC) I/O module is four.

NOTE: The maximum number of host interface I/O modules that are listed above does not include the 10 GbE Optical

I/O module for the HA interconnect. The HA interconnect is a fifth Ethernet module, but it is reserved for communication

between the two nodes of an HA pair, and is not available for host connections.

The maximum number of I/O modules, including both mandatory and optional I/O modules, supported in a system varies by configuration: Single node: 10 HA: 10 DD Extended Retention: 10 DD Cloud Tier: 10 HA + DD Cloud Tier: 11

Three I/O module slots are tied to each CPU in the system. When installing I/O modules, balance the load across the CPUs. The following table shows the CPU to slot mappings.

CPU I/O module slots

0 0, 1, 2

DD9800 245

CPU I/O module slots

1 3, 4, 5

2 6, 7, 8

3 9, 10, 11

The following table assigns rules for populating the I/O modules.

Table 171. I/O module slot population rules

Step I/O module type Slots Notes

1: Populate mandatory I/O modules

NVRAM 0

Quad Port SAS 2

Quad Port SAS 3

Quad Port SAS 6

Quad Port SAS 9 This slot remains empty if the system does not use DD Cloud Tier or DD Extended Retention.

Quad Port 10GbE Optical 11 This slot remains empty if the system does not use HA.

2: Populate host interface I/O modules

Quad Port 10GbE SR Quad Port 10 GBase-T Dual Port 16 Gbps Fibre

Channel

1, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10 Install host interface I/O modules in the remaining slots. Install the I/O modules to balance the load across the CPUs. Do not place two Ethernet or two FC I/O modules on one CPU.a

a. HA systems are the exception to this guidance, as a Quad Port 10GbE SR I or Quad Port 10 GBase-T /O module can be added in slot 10 alongside the HA interconnect I/O module in slot 11.

Internal system components The storage processor (SP) is a subassembly within the chassis that contains the memory risers with the DIMMs and a fan tray with fan modules. The SP module also contains the 4 CPUs, which cannot be removed or replaced.

The memory risers tray, which contains 8 memory risers with DIMMs, can be accessed from the front of the SP module. The memory risers are not hot swappable

The fan tray, which contains 8 fan modules, can be accessed from the front of the SP module. The fans are hot swappable.

The DIMMS can be accessed by pulling the entire SP module away from the chassis. Depending on the model, there are DIMMs totaling 256 GB or 768 GB.

The figures show the location of the SP module, the DIMM risers accessed from a partly removed SP module, and the fan tray partly removed.

Do not lift the DD9800 system, or the storage processor (SP) module, or any modules by the handle. The handle is not designed to support the weight of the populated shelf. Also do not carry the DD9800 system or the SP by the handle. The handles are only intended to be used to insert or remove the SP module.

246 DD9800

Figure 153. SP module

Figure 154. Releasing a memory riser

1. Left riser card ejector handle 2. Release button 3. Right riser card ejector handle

DD9800 247

Figure 155. Open fan tray

NOTE: Do not loosen the blue thumbscrew on the SP latch handle to access the fan tray. Use the orange thumbscrews on

the front as shown in the picture.

1. Left fan tray thumbscrew 2. Front panel left handle 3. Front panel right handle 4. Right fan tray thumbscrew 5. Location map of the fans

DIMM modules

The DD9800 system contains the following memory configurations:

Table 172. DD9800 memory configurations

System Base Expanded ER/DD Cloud Tier

DD9800 32 x 8 GB DIMMs (256 GB) 32 x 8 GB DIMMs + 32 x 16 GB DIMMS (768 GB)

32 x 8 GB DIMMs + 32 x 16 GB DIMMS (768 GB)

Cooling fans

A system contains eight hot-swappable cooling fans in a 7+1 redundant configuration, which is located in the front of the system within a movable fan tray. The fans provide cooling for the processors, DIMMs, and I/O modules. Each fan has an LED which glows amber when the fan is failed or faulted. A system can run with one fan faulted.

DD9800 and ES30 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table below. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity.

248 DD9800

ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain.

Table 173. DD9800 and ES30 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

ES30 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB) 1

Max RAW external capacity (TB) 2

DD9800 3 256 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

5 6 504 630

DD9800 w/ HA 3 256 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

5 6 504 630

DD9800 3, 4 768 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

5 6 1008 1260

DD9800 w/ HA 3 768 3x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

5 6 1008 1260

DD9800 w/ ER 3 768 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 8 2016 2520

DD9800 w/ Cloud Tier 3

768 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60; SATA 15, 30, 45

7 8 1008 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1260 (max), additional 300 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

DD9800 w/ HA and Cloud Tier 3

768 4x4 SAS 30, 45, 60

7 8 1008 (max), additional 240 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1260 (max), additional 300 SAS dedicated to Cloud Tier

1. This figure only counts drives that have user data in the shelves.

2. The raw capacity of an ES30 is 125% of the available capacity.

3. Only available with DD OS 6.x and greater.

4. DDOS 6..x and greater and FS15 SSD shelf configuration

Types of cabinets and power connections

The ES30 chassis is installed in two types of racks: 40U-C (existing racks) and the 40U-P (newer racks). The racks use one phase or 3-phase power connections.

3-Phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks that are used for several systems. In those situations, it is desirable to balance the current draw across all three phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration depends on the specific installation.

Cabling shelves

NOTE:

Before cabling the shelves, physically install all shelves in the racks. Refer to the rail kit installation instructions included

with the ES30 shelf for rack mounting.

DD9800 249

The documentation refers to two SAS HBAs. If only one HBA is allowed in a system, then use another port as defined

later for that specific system.

On an HA system, add cables from the second node to open ports at the end of the sets. The ports on the second node

must connect to the same sets as the corresponding ports on the first node.

Ports on the systems SAS HBA cards connect directly to a shelf controllers host port. For redundancy, you need to create dual paths by using a port on one SAS HBA card to connect to one shelf controller in each shelf set, and a port on another SAS HBA card to connect to another shelf controller in the same shelf set. With dual paths, if one SAS HBA card fails, the shelf is still operational. However, in the unlikely event any single shelf becomes completely disconnected from power or SAS cables and becomes disconnected from a previously operational shelf, the file system goes down and the shelf is not operational. This is considered a double failure.

There are two kinds of configurations: one shelf in a set or multiple shelves in a set.

DD9500 and cabling

NOTE: If a system installation does not follow ALL of these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum of four is preferred). You can have seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software. There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier

configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 174. Minimum and maximum configurations

System DD9500 DD9500 w/

Appliance 864 TB usable 864 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Minimum appliance shelf count

4 4 4

Maximum appliance shelf count

30 30 30

Extended Retention systems (ER)

1728 TB usable 2016 TB usable 2016 TB usable

Maximum shelves for ER 56 56 56

High Availability systems (HA)

864 TB usable 1008 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Maximum shelves for HA 42 42 47

Cloud Tier systems 1104 TB usable 1248 TB usable 1248 TB usable

Maximum shelves for Cloud Tier

42 42 47

The DD9500 base (non-Extended Retention) and HA systems supports six chains.

The following figures show cabling for base systems, HA systems, and systems with the Extended Retention software option.

NOTE: The racks are filled from bottom up.

250 DD9800

DD9800 and DS60 shelf guidelines

The system rediscovers newly configured shelves after it restarts. You can power off the system and recable shelves to any other position in a set, or to another set. To take advantage of this flexibility, you need to follow these rules before making any cabling changes:

Do not exceed the maximum shelf configuration values for your system as listed in the following table. For redundancy, the two connections from a system to a set of shelves must use ports on different SAS I/O modules. Use the Installation and Setup Guide for your system to minimize the chance of a cabling mistake. A system cannot exceed its maximum raw external shelf capacity, regardless of added shelf capacity. ES30 SATA shelves must be on their own chain. If ES30 SAS shelves are on the same chain as a DS60, the maximum number of shelves on that chain is 5.

Table 175. DD9800 and DS60 shelf configuration

DD system Memory required (GB)

SAS cards/ port per card

DS60 support (TB)

Max shelves per set

Max number of sets

Max external capacity available (TB)1

Max RAW external capacity (TB)

DD9800 2, 3 256 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 504 630

DD9800 w/ HA2, 3 256 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 504 630

DD9800 2, 3 768 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 1008 1260

DD9800 w/HA 2, 3 768 3x4 SAS 45, 60 4 6 1008 1260

DD9800 ER 2, 3 768 4x4 SAS 45, 60 4 8 2016 2520

DD9800 Cloud Tier 2, 3

768 4x4 SAS 45, 60 5 8 1008 + 240 for Cloud Tier

1260 + 300 for Cloud Tier

DD9800 Cloud Tier w/ HA 2, 3, 4

768 4x4 SAS 45, 60 5 8 1008 + 240 for Cloud Tier

1260 + 300 for Cloud Tier

NOTE: An entry of 45 corresponds to DS60-3 models and an entry of 60 corresponds to DS60-4 models.

1. This column only counts drives that have user data in the shelves. For example, a DS60 4-240 has 192TB.

2. With DD OS 6.x and greater with SSD.

3. Only available with DD OS 6.x and greater.

4. With Cloud Tier Storage.

3-phase power connections for 40U-P (current racks)

Some environments use 3-phase power for 40U-P racks used for several systems. In those situations it is desirable to balance the current draw across all 3 phases. The recommended 3-phase power cabling attempts to do that, but an optimal configuration is dependent on the specific installation.

DD9500 and DD9800 cabling

NOTE: If a system installation does not follow ALL of these rules, it is not a legitimate configuration.

Prerequisites:

Follow the minimum and maximum shelf capacity configuration provided in the table. You cannot have ES30 SATA and ES30 SAS shelves in the same set. You cannot exceed the maximum amount of raw capacity displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot exceed the maximum number of shelves displayed in the product's cabling table. You cannot have more than five ES30s in a single set (maximum of four is preferred). You can have seven ES30s for systems with Extended Retention software.

DD9800 251

There are no specific placement or cabling requirements for SSD shelves, or the metadata shelves for Cloud Tier configurations. These shelves can be installed and cabled the same way as standard ES30 shelves.

Table 176. Minimum and maximum configurations

System DD9500 DD9500 w/

Appliance 864 TB usable 864 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Minimum appliance shelf count

4 4 4

Maximum appliance shelf count

30 30 30

Extended Retention systems (ER)

1728 TB usable 2016 TB usable 2016 TB usable

Maximum shelves for ER 56 56 56

High Availability systems (HA)

864 TB usable 1008 TB usable 1008 TB usable

Maximum shelves for HA 42 42 47

Cloud Tier systems 1104 TB usable 1248 TB usable 1248 TB usable

Maximum shelves for Cloud Tier

42 42 47

The DD9500 base (non-Extended Retention) and HA systems supports six chains.

The following figures show cabling for base systems, HA systems, and systems with the Extended Retention software option.

NOTE: The racks are filled from bottom up.

252 DD9800

DD9900

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DD9900 system features DD9900 system specifications DD9900 storage capacity and configurations DD9900 front panel DD9900 SSD usage and configurations DD9900 rear panel PCIe HBAs DD9900 DIMM configurations DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities

DD9900 system features

Table 177. DD9900 system features

Features Single Node HA

Processor 4 x Intel Xeon 6240, 18C, 2.6GHz, 150W

Kernel 4.4

Memory Configurations Total 1152 GB

DIMMs 24 x 16 GB + 24 x 32 GB

HDD Drive Size 8 TB ( 3 TB and 4 TB also supported)

Supported Capacity Active Tier 576 <-> 1536 TBu

Cloud Tier 2016 TBu (Cloud Tier)

Disk Groups Active Tier 8 <-> 18 (8 TB), 8 <-> 32 (4 TB), 8 <-> 28 (3 TB)

Cloud Tier (4 TB) 5

SSDs for DD OS in 2.5" bays in head 4, 1.92TB, 1 WPD

Stream Count 1885 Wr, 300 Rd

Cache SSDs 2.5% 10 (External FS25) 3.84 TB

Cache SSD shelf FS25 1

HA Private Interconnect N/A (3) 10G Base-T ports (NDC)

16 GB NVRAM 1

HW Accelerator 100 Quick Assist Technology (QAT) 8970

2

Internal SAS PowerEdge Raid Controller (PERC) H330+ 12 Gbps SAS

1

External SAS PMC Quad Port 12 Gbps SAS

2 default, 3 supported

13

DD9900 253

Table 177. DD9900 system features (continued)

Features Single Node HA

SAS String Depth (max) ES30/ES40 7

DS60 3

Host interface HBAs 2-port 100 GbE-QSFP28 4 maximum

2-port QL41000 25 GbE- SFP28

4 maximum

4-port QL41164 10 GbE- SFP+

4 maximum

4-port QL41164 10GBASE- T

4 maximum

4-port QLE2694 16 Gb FC 4 maximum

Network Daughter Card options (system will have one of the two options)

4-port QL41000 10 GbE- SP+ FasLinQ

1

4-port QL41164 10GBASE- T

1

DD9900 system specifications

Figure 156. System dimensions

Table 178. DD9900 system specifications

Xa Xb Y Za (with bezel)

Za (without bezel)

Zb Zc

482.0 mm (18.98 inches)

434.0 mm (17.09 inches)

130.3 mm (5.13 inches)

35.0 mm (1.37 inches)

22.0 mm (0.87 inches)

726.2 mm (28.59 inches)

777.046 mm (30.59 inches)

A DD9900 system weighs up to 110.01 lbs (49.9 kg).

254 DD9900

Table 179. System operating environment

Operating Temperature 50 to 95 F (10 to 35 C), derate 1.1 C per 1000 feet, above 7500 feet up to 10,000 feet (32.25 C at 10,000)

Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, non-condensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

Operating Acoustic Noise L wad sound power, 7.5 Bels

DD9900 storage capacity and configurations The following table provides storage capacity and configuration information for the DD9900 system.

Table 180. DD9900 storage capacity and configurations

Tier CPU-SP SKU Memory Front 2.5" SSDs Max. Useable Capacity

Cloud Tier Metadata

DD9900 Active Tier

18 core, 150 W 6240

1152 GB (24 x 16 GB) + (24 x 32 GB)

10 1536TBu N/A

DD9900 with Cloud Tier 1

18 core, 150 W 6240

1152 GB (24 x 16 GB) + (24 x 32 GB)

10 2016TBu 300 TB raw/240 TB usable

1 Cloud Tier can be added to a DD9900 and is enabled by a license and disk packs for the Cloud Tier metadata.

The Memory column lists the total memory that is required and the number and type of the DIMMs used. All memory DIMMs are DDR4 RDIMMs at the highest supported speed of 2666MT/s.

High Availability

DD9900 supports Active-Passive High Availability (A-P HA or just A-P). The following table summarizes the hardware changes to support A-P HA:

Table 181. HA configuration requirements

Hardware Change to support HA

Active-Passive HA

Additional memory No extra memory required.

HA private interconnect Cluster Interconnect : A-P requires the use of two ports from the on-board quad-port 10 GbE Network Daughter Card.

NVRAM A-P requires a single 16 GB NVRAM card (same as non-HA).

SAS Connectivity Both nodes of an A-P HA pair require redundant SAS connectivity to the storage array. (Note: a single node system also has redundant connectivity to the storage arrays.)

SSD Requirements SSDs are contained within FS25 and must be accessible from both nodes.

HA Network Interconnect

The HA Network Interconnect, required for HA configurations, is a dedicated 10 GbE connection between the two nodes of an HA pair. The interconnect is used to write data (and metadata) from the active node's NVRAM to the passive node's NVRAM.

Two 10GbE links are used to meet the bandwidth requirements for the private interconnect. Traffic across the private interconnect has roughly the same bandwidth as is written to the NVRAM card. The dual 10-GbE links can move about 2 GB/s in each direction.

DD9900 255

HA SAS Interconnect

HA configurations require that the SSDs' cache drives be shared between both nodes and have redundant SAS connections to all shelves.

DD9900 front panel

Figure 157. DD9900 front panel

Table 182. Front panel features

Item Ports, panels, and slots Description

1 Left control panel Contains system health and system ID, status LED, and optional iDRAC Quick Sync 2 (wireless).

2 Drive slots Enable you to install drives that are supported on your system.

3 Right control panel Contains the power button, VGA port, iDRAC Direct port, and USB ports.

4 Information tag The Information tag is a slide-out label panel that contains system information such as Service Tag, NIC, MAC address, and so on. If you have opted for the secure default access to iDRAC, the Information tag also contains the iDRAC secure default password.

5 Drive bay Hard drive bay

Table 183. Front LEDs

Name Color Purpose

Control Panel Status LED Blue/Amber Status: Healthy: Solid Blue Fault: Blink Amber Sys ID: Blink Blue

System Power Button/LED Green Indication that the system has power.

Drive activity LEDs Green Lit green when the drive is powered. Blinks during drive activity.

Drive service LEDs Green Lit solid amber when a disk drive needs service.

Front LEDs

Figure 158. Front left control panel status LEDs

256 DD9900

NOTE: The indicators display solid amber if any error occurs.

Table 184. System health and system ID indicator codes

System health and ID indicator code

Solid blue Indicates that the system is turned on, system is healthy, and system ID mode is not active. Press the system health and system ID button to switch to system ID mode.

Blinking blue Indicates that the system ID mode is active. Press the system health and system ID button to switch to system health mode.

Solid amber Indicates that the system is in fail-safe mode.

Blinking amber Indicates that the system is experiencing a fault. Check the System event log or the LCD panel, if available on the bezel, for specific error messages.

Figure 159. Front right control panel power button LEDs

Table 185. Right control panel features

Item Indicator, button, or connector

Description

1 Power button Indicates if the system is turned on or off. Press the power button to manually turn on or off the system.

NOTE: Press the power button to gracefully shut down an ACPI-compliant operating system.

DD9900 257

Table 185. Right control panel features (continued)

Item Indicator, button, or connector

Description

2 USB port (2) The USB ports are 4-pin, 2.0-compliant. These ports enable you to connect USB devices to the system.

3 iDRAC Direct port The iDRAC Direct port is micro USB 2.0-compliant. This port enables you to access the iDRAC Direct features.

4 iDRAC Direct LED The iDRAC Direct LED indicator lights up to indicate that the iDRAC Direct port is connected.

5 VGA port Enables you to connect a display device to the system.

Table 186. iDRAC Direct LED indicator codes

iDRAC Direct LED indicator code Condition

Solid green for two seconds Indicates that the laptop or tablet is connected.

Flashing green (on for two seconds and off for two seconds)

Indicates that the laptop or tablet that is connected is recognized.

Turns of Indicates that the laptop or tablet is unplugged.

Figure 160. Drive LEDs

The front contains 25 2.5" disk drive slots that can be populated with SSDs. Each SSD is housed in a drive carrier that contains two LEDs at the bottom of the carrier. The carrier's left blue LED is lit whenever an SSD is present in the slot, and it blinks when I/O activity is occurring on the disk. The right amber LED is usually off and lights amber to indicate that the disk is faulted and must be serviced.

DD9900 SSD usage and configurations

DD9900 system uses an 8 x 2.5" drive slot midplane. However, metadata cache devices are implemented using the external flash shelf FS25. This allows dual access to all SSD devices which doubles the SSD access bandwidth.

SSD configurations

The SSD slots on the front of the enclosure are shown below. The system come from the factory with SSDs populated in the enclosure.

258 DD9900

DD9900 supports 2.5% SSD option out of factory. Based on 3.84 TB SSD capacity, the required number of SSDs for each DD9900 configuration is provided in the following table.

Table 187. DD9900 SSD configurations

Configuration Single node HA

Cache SSDs 10 (External FS25) 3.84 TB

SSD boot drives

Other SAS SSDs are used to boot the operating system. Boot disks and external disk shelves are used to log system information. Boot disks are installed from the other end of the front 2.5" disk slots to physically differentiate the cache SSDs.

Table 188. SSD boot drives

# of boot disks Installed in slots

Four 1.92TB SSDs 0,1,2,3

DD9900 rear panel

Figure 161. DD9900 rear panel

Item Slot, button, or connector Description

1 Half-height PCIe expansion card slot

The PCIe expansion card slot connects one half-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

2 Full-height PCIe expansion slots The PCIe expansion card slot connects up to three full-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

3 NIC ports (4) The NIC ports that are integrated on the network daughter card (NDC) provide network connectivity.

4 Half-height PCIe expansion card slot

The PCIe expansion card slot connects one half-height PCIe expansion cards to the system.

5 Power supply unit (2) Supports two AC power supply units (PSUs)

6 VGA port Enables you to connect a display device to the system.

DD9900 259

Item Slot, button, or connector Description

7 Serial port Enables you to connect a serial device to the system.

8 iDRAC9 Enterprise port Enables you to remotely access iDRAC.

9 USB port (2) The USB ports are 9-pin and 3.0-compliant. These ports enable you to connect USB devices to the system.

10 System identification button The System Identification (ID) button is available on the front and back of the systems. Press the button to identify a system in a rack by turning on the system ID button. You can also use the system ID button to reset iDRAC and to access BIOS using the step through mode.

11 Status indicator cable port Enables you to connect the status indicator cable and view system status when the CMA is installed.

Rear LEDs

Figure 162. Onboard ID and iDRAC LEDs

1. iDRAC management port: a. The green link LED on the left is lit whenever there is link at 1000BaseT and 100BaseT speeds. The link LED is off when

the link speed is 10BaseT or there is no link. b. The green link LED on the right blinks whenever there is traffic on the port.

2. System identification LED: This blue LED can be turned on by software to visually identify the system.

PSU FRU LEDs

There are two power supplies, one in the upper left of the rear chassis and one on the bottom right. Each power supply has three LEDs: AC good, DC good, and Service. The top PSU is "right-side up" and the bottom PSU is "upside down."

Table 189. PSU FRU LEDs

Name Color Definition

AC Good Green AC input is as expected.

DC Good Green DC output is as expected.

Service Amber PSU has a fault condition and a must be replaced.

260 DD9900

PCIe HBAs

A slot in the chassis that does not contain an HBA must have a filler panel installed in the empty slots. This is required for EMI compliance.

This system supports 13 I/O modules slots, three of which are 8-lane PCIe Gen3, and ten are 16-lane PCIe Gen3. Several networking, NVRAM, SAS, and Fibre Channel I/O modules are supported.

Slot assignment

The following table lists the DD9900 configuration slot assignments:

Table 190. DD9900 slot assignments

Description Slot

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GbE SFP+ PCIe, Full Height 6, 8, 4, 10, 3, 13, 5

QLogic, 41164 4 Port, 10GBASE-T PCIe, Full Height 8, 4, 3

QLogic, 41262 2 Port, 25Gb SFP28 PCIe, Full Height 6, 8, 4, 10, 3, 13, 5

Mellanox CX-5 2x 100GbE QSFP28 PCIe, FH 8, 3, 4, 13, 10

PERC H330+ SAS RAID Adapter, FH 1

QAT,INTEL,8970,FH, Avnet p/n 1QA89701G1P5 2, 7

PM8072,SAS12,4P,FH, MicroSemi 2295200-R 9, 12, 5

FC16,QLE2694-DEL-BK,TRG,QP,FH 5, 6, 8, 4, 10, 3, 13

16GB NVRAM,FH 11

Host Interface (x16) is 2-port 100 Gb QSFP28 Ethernet.

Host Interface (x8) are:

2-port 25 Gb SFP28 Ethernet 4-port 10 Gb SFP+ Ethernet 4-port 10GBaseT Ethernet 4-port 16 Gb Fibre Channel

External SAS is 4-port 12 Gb SAS card and is required for external storage for HA and Single Node configurations.

NVRAM is the 16GB NVRAM.

Internal SAS Mezzanine is 2-port 12 Gb Mini-SAS HD SAS controller mezzanine.

Host Network Interface Mezzanine is either:

4-port 10GBaseSR SFP+ Ethernet mezzanine 4-port 10GBaseT RJ45 Ethernet mezzanine

I/O population rules

The following figures show the I/O module slot numbers.

The slot labeled N is the network daughter card, which contains ports ethMa, ethMb, ethMc, and ethMd.

The physical interface name format for the other I/O module slots is ethXy, where X is the slot number and y is an alphanumeric character. For example, eth0a.

For most horizontal I/O module NIC interfaces, the port numbering goes from left to right, with ethXa on the left. The horizontal I/O module slots on the left-in slots 11-13 are inverted. The port numbering on these I/O modules in these slots goes from right to left, with ethXa on the right.

For vertical I/O module NIC interfaces, the port numbering goes from top to bottom, with ethXa at the top.

DD9900 261

The management port ethMa is the first port set up by the Configuration Wizard. It is marked with a red rectangle in the figure below.

Figure 163. Slot numbering

The general population rules can be summarized as:

1. Populate a given I/O in the available slots listed. 2. Select the first available slot in the group. 3. Follow the steps for each I/O in the order specified. 4. Slots 1, 5 and 6 are x8 PCIE slots. All other PCIE slots are x16.

NOTE: Installing HBAs requires opening the system and installing the HBA into the riser.

Riser# Slots (from top to bottom)

Left 11, 12, 13

Right 8, 9, 10

Slots 1, N, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are not installed on a riser.

Gen3 PCIe

Slots support Gen3 PCIe.

I/O module servicing

All I/O modules are user serviceable and may be replaced when the system is powered off. On-line service of I/O modules is not support. A module that is hot-inserted into the system will remain powered off and will not be powered on until the next reboot of the system. A module that is hot-removed causes an operating system to immediately reboot.

DD9900 DIMM configurations

The SP Module contains 4 Intel SP processors each with an integrated memory controller that supports six channels of DDR4 memory. The CPU allows two DIMM slots per channel, so the SP Module supports 24 DIMM slots.

Each DDR4 DIMM is connected to the system board through an industry standard 288-pin DDR4 DIMM connector. This system uses registered DIMMs with Dell EMC ControlCenter at 72 bits wide (64-bits data + 8-bits Dell EMC ControlCenter) up to a maximum of 2666MT/s speed.

Table 191. Memory configurations

Tier Total Memory Memory DIMM Configuration

DD9900 Active Tier 1152 GB 24 x 32 GB + 24 x 16 GB

DD9900 Cloud Tier 1152 GB 24 x 32 GB + 24 x 16 GB

262 DD9900

Memory locations

To ensure maximum memory performance, there are memory DIMM population rules so that the memory loading and interleaving are optimal. The following table below specifies the DIMM location rules. Each DIMM location contains either a 16GB DIMM or a 32GB DIMM.

Table 192. DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 1

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

A6 A12 A5 A11 A4 A10 A7 A1 A8 A2 A9 A3

288 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

Table 193. DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 2

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

B6 B12 B5 B11 B4 B10 B7 B1 B8 B2 B9 B3

288 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

Table 194. DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 3

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

C6 C12 C5 C11 C4 C10 C7 C1 C8 C2 C9 C3

288 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

Table 195. DD9900 DIMM configuration CPU 4

Total (GB)

Channel C Channel B Channel A Channel D Channel E Channel F

D6 D12 D5 D11 D4 D10 D7 D1 D8 D2 D9 D3

288 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB 16 GB 32 GB

DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 storage shelves configurations and capacities

DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 do not store data on internal disk drives and rely on external disk array shelves to provide storage. DS60 disk shelves and ES40 shelves are connected to systems using 12 Gb Mini-SAS HD ports, which are implemented on the SAS HBAs.

The systems also support external metadata storage (cache) shelf FS25. External cache shelf only hosts DD OS depended metadata for performance acceleration.

The ES40 SAS shelf contains 15 drives, which includes 12 drives of usable storage, two parity drives, and one hot spare.

The DS60 shelf contains 60 drives. Drives are configured in four groups of 15 drives. Each group contains two parity drives and one hot spare, so each group provides 12 drives of usable storage. A fully configured DS60 shelf provides 48 drives of usable storage.

Table 196. Shelves shipped from factory, in rack

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB ES40 8 TB DS60 8 TB DS60

Table 197. Shelves shipped from factory, boxed

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB ES40 8 TB ES40 8 TB ES40

4 TB DS60 8 TB DS60 8 TB DS60

DD9900 263

Table 198. Additional shelves supported

DD6900 DD9400 DD9900

4 TB SAS ES30/DS60 4 TB SAS ES30/DS60 4 TB SAS ES30/DS60

3 TB SAS ES30/DS60 3 TB SAS ES30/DS60 3 TB SAS ES30/DS60

NOTE: 3 TB shelves are only support on controller upgrades and not on fresh installs.

Table 199. Shelf usable capacities

Hard drive size (TB) Shelf Useable TB

4 ES40 48

4 DS60 192

8 DS60 384

The following table lists the maximum number of shelves per chain:

Table 200. Supported shelf count per chain

Shelf type Max # from factory Max # per chain

SAS ES30/ES40 4 7

DS60 2 3

DS60 + ES30/ES40 n/a 5

F25 1 1

The connector type for ES30 is Mini-SAS. Special cables may be necessary when combining ES30 and ES40 shelves on the same chain (enabled but not recommended).

DD9400 and DD9900 system capacities are optimized for use with DS60 shelves containing 8 TB drives. DS60 shelves can be populated with one to four packs of fifteen 8 TB, or 4 TB drives. Different 4 TB and 8 TB capacity disk packs may be mixed within a single DS60 shelf. ES40 SAS shelves and DS60 shelves of mixed capacities may be attached so long as the maximum storage capacity of the system is not exceeded.

264 DD9900

DS60 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

DS60 overview DS60 site requirements DS60 hardware specifications DS60 front panel Back panel Disk enclosure interior Expansion shelf cables Ports

DS60 overview Adding DS60 expansion shelves to a system increases the system's storage capacity.

The expansion shelves are organized by sets (or chains). The following table shows the number of DS60 shelves in set (chain) each system can support.

Table 201. DS60 shelf set support

System (base) DS60 shelves

DD6300 1 shelf only*

DD6800, DD9300, DD9500, and DD9800 4 per set (chain)

* DD6300 systems only supports the addition of one DS60 expansion shelf.

DS60 site requirements This table lists the DS60 site requirements. See DS60 hardware specifications on page 266 for hardware specifications information.

Table 202. Site requirements

Requirement DS60 Expansion Shelf

Vertical space in standard 19", 4-post rack 5U including a 1U Cable Managements Tray. Do not use a two- post rack. See the slide rail and installation documentation in the packaging for installing in a rack.

Air conditioning Air conditioning that can cope with the maximum BTU/hr thermal rating.

Temperature controls Adequate temperature control with a gradient (change) not to exceed 30 C in an hour.

Front bezel clearance 1.56 inches (4.0 cm) of unobstructed clearance.

Back panel clearance 5 inches (12.7 cm) of unobstructed clearance.

Airflow In a closed or multi-unit rack, ensure that the unit has adequate airflow. If the equipment is mounted in an enclosed (as opposed to a four-post open rack), the front and rear

14

DS60 265

Table 202. Site requirements (continued)

Requirement DS60 Expansion Shelf

doors should have 65% minimum open area for airflow. Whether in an open or enclosed rack, use filler panels to prevent hot air re-circulation. The rack design and installation should take into consideration the maximum ambient operating temperature of the equipment, which is 35 C.

Power/grounding The Power distribution within the rack should provide a safe electrical earth connection. Voltage should be 200-240 VAC; 50 or 60 Hz. Plug four power cords - two from each power supply into separate branch circuit supplies for redundancy one set of cords from one power supply goes to one branch and the second set of cords from the other power supply goes to a different branch. Each receptacle must be capable of safely supplying 0.94 amps from each power socket or 1.87 amps from each socket in case of a redundant circuit.

DS60 hardware specifications

NOTE: All ratings assume a fully configured DS60 shelves.

Table 203. Hardware specifications

Specification Description

AC line voltage 200 to 240 Vac 10%, single-phase, 47 to 63 Hz

AC line current (operating maximum) 4.9 A max at 200 Vac

Power consumption (operating maximum) 980 VA (931W) max

Power factor 0.95 min at full load, low voltage

Heat dissipation (operating maximum) 3.36 x 106 J/hr, (3177 Btu/hr) max

Dimensions (rack mounted) Height: 8.75 in (22.23 cm) 5U (4U plus 1U cable management tray).

Width including rails: 17.50 in (44.45 cm) Depth (chassis only): 34.5 in (87.63 cm) Maximum depth (fully configured): 36.4 in (92.46 cm)

Shelf weight Without FRUs installed: 55.0 lb ( 24.7 kg) With FRUs installed: 225.0 lb (102 kg)

Operating temperature Ambient temperature: 41o F to 104o F (5o C to 40o C) Temperature gradient: 18o F/hr (10o C/hr) Relative humidity extremes: 20% to 80% noncondensing

Recommended operating relative humidity 40% to 55% noncondensing

Operating elevation -50 to 7500 ft (-16 to 2300 m)

Non-operating (shipping and storage) temperature Ambient temperature: -40o F to 149o F (-40o C to 65o F) Temperature gradient: 45o F/hr (25oC/hr) Relative humidity: 10% to 90% noncondensing Elevation: -50 to 35,000 ft (-16 to 10,600 m)

266 DS60

DS60 front panel

Figure 164. DS60 front panel

NOTE: The front LEDs are identified inside the red rectangle.

If there is a problem with the enclosure, the enclosure fault light LED (marked with a triangle with an exclamation mark) is amber. When the shelf is powered on and active, the disk enclosure power LED (marked with a circle with a vertical line) is blue.

Table 204. LED status lights

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Disk Enclosure Power 1 Blue Power to enclosure is on.

Disk Enclosure Fault 1 Amber On when any fault condition exists; if the fault is not obvious from a disk or fan module light, look at the back of the disk enclosure.

NOTE: The individual disk LEDs are only visible when the disk enclosure is opened to verify the disks inside.

For part replacement information, refer to the DS60 Expansion Shelf Installation and FRU Replacement Guide.

Back panel The back panel has two dual power supplies and two LCCs (Link Controller Cards).

Figure 165. DS60 back panel

Each controller has 4 SAS ports (laid out as 2 pairs). Standard systems and systems with the licensed HA feature only use ports 0 and 2 on each controller. Ports 1 and 3 typically have a plastic plug blocking the unused ports to make inserting a cable into the correct ports easier.

DS60 267

Table 205. Status lights visible from rear of disk enclosure

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Controller power 1 per controller Green On when the Controller is powered on.

Controller fault 1 per controller Amber On when either the Controller or a SAS connection is faulty. On during power-on self test.

Link active 4 per controller Blue On when the host connection is active.

Power supply input voltage

1 per power supply Green Input power green when it is working.

Power supply fault* 1 per power supply Amber On when the power supply is faulty or is not receiving AC line voltage.

Flashing when either a multiple blower or ambient over temperature condition has shut off DC power to the system.

The DS60 continues to run with a single power supply and two fans (out of the three fans).

Disk enclosure interior The disks are visible when the DS60 is pulled out of the rack and the top cover is removed from the chassis. There are also three fans in the front of the disk enclosure and each fan has a fault LED.

Each disk in the enclosure has two LEDs. The active LED glows blue when the disk is functional. The disk fault LED glows amber when the disk has failed.

NOTE: The individual disk and fan LEDs are only visible when the disk enclosure is opened to verify the disks inside.

Figure 166. Fans and disk drives inside the disk enclosure

Table 206. LED status lights

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Disk Active NOTE: Only visible after the disk enclosure is opened.

1 per disk module Blue No LED when the slot is empty or has a filler module. Also, off when the disk is powered

268 DS60

Table 206. LED status lights (continued)

Light Quantity Color Meaning

down by command; for example, the result of a temperature fault.

Fast blinking when the SAS drive is powered up but not spinning; this is a normal part of the spin- up sequence, occurring during the spin-up delays of a slot.

On when the drive has power but is not handing any I/O activity (the ready state).

Disk and fan lights are only available when enclosure is removed from the chassis.

Slow blinking when the drive is spinning and handling I/O activity.

Disk Fault NOTE: Only visible after the disk enclosure is opened.

1 per disk module Amber On when the disk module is faulty, or as an indication to replace the drive.

Fan fault 1 per fan module Amber On when the fan module is faulty, or as an indication to replace the fan.

The DD OS software manages the drives in packs (groups) of 15. A top down view of the chassis shows that the disks are arranged in four packs (groups) of 15 drives. The packs are color codedpack 1 purple, pack 2 is yellow, pack 3 is green, and pack 4 is pink. A pack must have the same size drives. Pack 1 is shown within the red rectangle.

DS60 269

Figure 167. Drives as packs

The next table shows how the drives are distributed by packs (groups) and numbered physically. The bottom of the table represents the front of the shelf

Table 207. Physical drives

Rows Pack 1 Pack 2 Pack 3 Pack 4

E 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-11

D 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-11

C 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-11

B 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-11

A 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-11

Although the disk numbers are physically 0 to 59, the disks are reported logically by system software commands in two ways:

A range from 1 to 60, usually reported with the enclosure number (e.g. 3.37) The position matrix A-E (1-12)

For part replacement information, refer to the DS60 Expansion Shelf Installation and FRU Replacement Guide.

270 DS60

Expansion shelf cables Expansion shelves are connected to each other and to the controller with qualified cables. The expansion shelf can be connected to supported systems only by using SAS (serial-attached SCSI) cables. A shelf with qualified disks can be added as an expansion shelf if there are complete drive packs (15 in a pack) in the correct position.

NOTE: Shelves for other Dell EMC product lines look identical. Check the product numbers when unpacking.

DS60 cables

The DS60 shelves use cables with HD-mini-SAS connectors at both ends to connect the shelves to the controllers that have SAS I/O modules.

The DS60 connector is referred as the HD-mini-SAS connector and is same as the I/O module connectors. These cables are available in 3M, 4M, and 5M lengths.

Use the appropriate length for the connection you are making:

Use the 3-meter cable in the same rack either to connect to a controller or shelf to adjacent shelf. Use a 3-meter, 4-meter, or 5-meter cable when a DS60 is in another rack.

Figure 168. HD-mini-SAS connector

Table 208. HD-mini-SAS to mini-SAS cable part numbers

Cable Part Number Cable Length

038-004-380-01 3M(118 in.)

038-000-212-00 4M (158 in.)

038-000-214-00 5M (196 in.)

Special cables must be used when attaching an ES30 to a chain with a DS60. Specifically, one HOST (circle) connection and one EXPANSION (diamond) cables are connected between the ES30 LCC and the DS60 LCC connection. Since this is not a common situation, only two expansion cable lengths are available.

Table 209. HD-mini-SAS to ES30 host and ES30 expansion port cable part numbers

Cable Part Number Cable Type Cable Length

038-003-810 Host 2M (78 in.)

038-003-813 Host 5M (196 in.)

DS60 271

Table 209. HD-mini-SAS to ES30 host and ES30 expansion port cable part numbers (continued)

Cable Part Number Cable Type Cable Length

038-004-108 Expansion 2M (78 in.)

038-004-111 Expansion 5M (196 in.)

The cable connectors must be secured with their latch assembly.

Ports Depending on the model, a system has two to four quad-port SAS IO modules installed. The DS60 shelf has two controllers, and each DS60 controller has four ports, labeled 0, 1, 2, and 3 (right to left).

272 DS60

ES30 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

ES30 overview Site requirements ES30 hardware specifications Front panel Back panel Ports

ES30 overview Adding ES30 expansion shelves to a system increases the system's storage capacity.

The expansion shelves are organized by sets (or chains). The following table shows the number of ES30 shelves than can be in a set.

Table 210. ES30 shelves in a set

Configuration ES30 shelves

Base systems 14

Extended Retention software option 17

For redundancy, a shelf set is usually connected to two separate SAS I/O modules or HBA cards on the controller, and all of the shelves within a set are connected to each other via dual paths.

Site requirements This table lists the site requirements.

Table 211. Site requirements

Requirement expansion shelf

Vertical Space in Standard 19", 4-post Rack

3U. Do not use a two-post rack. See the slide rail and installation documentation in the packaging for installing in a rack.

Air Conditioning Air conditioning that can cope with the maximum BTU/hr thermal rating.

Temperature Controls Adequate temperature control with a gradient (change) not to exceed 30 C in an hour.

Front Bezel Clearance 1.56 inches (4.0 cm) of unobstructed clearance.

Back Panel Clearance 5 inches (12.7 cm) of unobstructed clearance.

Airflow In a closed or multi-unit rack, ensure that the unit has adequate airflow. If the equipment is mounted in an enclosed (as opposed to a four-post open rack), the front and rear doors should have 65% minimum open area for airflow. Whether in an open or enclosed rack, use filler panels to prevent hot air recirculation. The rack design and installation should take into consideration the maximum ambient operating temperature of the equipment, which is 35 C.

Power/ Grounding Two single-phase AC power outlets with an earth ground conductor (safety ground). A safe electrical earth connection must be provided to each power cord. Voltage should be 100-120 VAC or 200-240 VAC; 50 or 60 Hz. Use only with branch circuits protected by a minimum

15

ES30 273

Table 211. Site requirements (continued)

Requirement expansion shelf

15A overcurrent protector. Plug the two power cords into separate branch circuit supplies for redundancy.

ES30 hardware specifications

NOTE: All ratings assume a fully configured ES30.

Table 212. ES30 hardware specifications

Specification Description

AC line voltage 100 to 240 Vac 10%, single-phase, 47 to 63 Hz

AC line current (operating maximum) 2.8 A max at 100 Vac, 1.4 A max at 200 Vac

Power consumption (operating maximum) 280 VA (235 W) max

Power factor 0.98 min at full load, low voltage

Heat dissipation (operating maximum) 8.46 x 105 J/hr, (800 Btu/hr) max

Dimensions (rack mounted, with bezel) Width: 17.62" (45 cm) Depth: 14 (35.56cm) Height: 5.25 (13.34cm) 3 RU

Maximum Weight 68 lbs (30.8 kg)

Table 213. System operating environment

Operating Temperature Ambient temperature: 10o C to 35o C (50o F to 95o F)

Temperature gradient: 10o C/hr (180o

F/hr) Relative humidity extremes: 20% to

80% noncondensing

Recommended Operating Relative Humidity

40% to 55% noncondensing

Operating Humidity Ambient temperature: -40o C to 65o

C (-40o F to 149o F) Temperature gradient: 25o C/hr

(45oF/hr) Relative humidity: 10% to 90%

noncondensing

Non-operating Temperature -40 to +149 F (-40 to +65 C)

Operating Acoustic Noise Sound power, LWAd: 7.4 bels. Sound pressure, LpAm: 58 dB. (Declared noise emission per ISO 9296.)

Expansion Shelves: Max 58 dB LpA average measured at bystander positions

Front panel After you unlock and remove the snap-on bezel on the front panel, the 15 disks are visible. Disk numbers, as reported by system commands, range from 1 to 15. When facing the front panel, Disk 1 is located in the leftmost slot in the enclosure and Disk 15 in the rightmost slot.

274 ES30

Figure 169. ES30 front panel (bezel removed)

NOTE: The flanges or sheet metal on the ES30 show 0 to 14 but the software will refer to the logical numbering of 1 to 15.

Each disk in the enclosure has two LEDs. The disks active LED glows green when the disk is functional. The disk fault LED glows amber when the disk has failed.

If there is a problem with the enclosure, the enclosure fault light is amber. The disk enclosure power light should be on (blue) when the shelf is powered on.

Figure 170. Front panel LEDs

1. Disk enclosure fault light 2. Disk enclosure power light 3. Disk active light 4. Disk fault light

Table 214. Status lights visible from front of disk enclosure

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Disk enclosure fault light

1 Amber On when any fault condition exists; if the fault is not obvious from a disk module light, look at the back of the disk enclosure.

Disk enclosure power light

1 Blue Power to enclosure is on.

Disk active light 1 per disk module Green No LED when the slot is empty or has a filler module. Also, off when the disk is powered down by command; for example, the result of a temperature fault.

Fast blinking when the SATA/SAS drive is powered up but not spinning; this is a normal part of the spin-up sequence, occurring during the spin-up delays of a slot.

On when the drive has power but is not handing any I/O activity (the ready state.

Slow blinking when the drive is spinning and handling I/O activity.

ES30 275

Table 214. Status lights visible from front of disk enclosure (continued)

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Disk fault light 1 per disk module Amber On when the disk module is faulty, or as an indication to replace the drive.

Back panel For redundancy, the shelf has two identical power supply/cooling modules and two identical shelf controllers which are placed in reverse order.

NOTE: When replacing a component, note its orientation before removing it. Insert the replacement in the same position.

Power supply A and controller A are located at the bottom of the chassis, and power supply B and controller B are located at the top of the chassis.

Figure 171. Back panel: Power modules and controllers

1. LEDs Power supply B: Power LED Power fault: Amber Blower fault: Amber

2. Expansion (Out) 3. Host (In) 4. Enclosure address (not used) 5. Power (Green) or Fault (Amber) 6. Bus ID (not used) 7. Host link active 8. Expansion link active 9. LEDs

Power supply A Power LED Power fault: Amber Blower fault: Amber

276 ES30

Figure 172. Power Supply A LEDs

Each shelf controller has two SAS ports. The port labeled with a circle symbol is the Host port, and the port labeled with a diamond symbol is the Expansion port. The Expansion ports are located on the outside, and the Host ports on the inside (reversed controller positions).

Table 215. Status lights visible from rear of disk enclosure

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Controller Power 1 per Controller Blue or Green On when the Controller is powered on.

Controller Fault 1 per Controller Amber On when either the Controller or a SAS connection is faulty. On during power-on self-test

Host Link Active 1 per Controller Blue On when the host connection is active.

Expansion Link Active 1 per Controller Blue On when the expansion connection is active.

Power Supply Active 1 per power supply Green On when the power supply is operating.

Power Supply Fault* 1 per power supply Amber On when the power supply is faulty or is not receiving AC line voltage.

Flashing when either a multiple blower or ambient over temperature condition has shut off DC power to the system.

Blower Fault* 1 per power supply Amber On when one of the blowers in the power supply is faulty.

*The ES30 and continue to run with a single power supply and three of its four blowers. Removing a power/cooling module constitutes a multiple blower fault condition, and powers down the shelf unless you replace a module within two minutes.

Ports Depending on the model, a system has one to four dual- or quad-port SAS HBA cards or SAS I/O modules installed. The ES30 shelf has two controllers (B located above A). Each controller has two ports, a host and an expansion port.

ES30 277

ES40

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

ES40 overview Dimensions and weights Power requiremements DAE-to-DAE copper cabling Product service tag

ES40 overview Storage capacity can be increased by adding ES40 expansion shelves to DD6900, DD9400, and DD9900 systems.

The expansion shelves are organized by sets (or chains). The following table shows the number of ES40 shelves that can be in a set.

Table 216. ES40 shelves in a set

System ES40 shelves

DD6900 17

DD9400 17

DD9900 17

For redundancy, a shelf set is connected to two separate SAS I/O modules or HBA cards on the controller, and all shelves within a set are connected to each other using dual paths.

Dimensions and weights Table 217. Dimensions and weight

Dimensions Vertical size Weight (see note)

Height: 5.25 in (13.34 cm)

3 NEMA units 68 lb (30.8 kg) with 15 disksWidth: 17.62 in (44.75 cm)

Depth: 14.0 in (35.6 cm)

Note: The weight does not include mounting rails. Allow 5-10 lb (2.3-4.5 kg) for a rail set. The weights listed in this table do not describe enclosures with solid state disk drives with Flash memory (called Flash or SSD drives). These Flash drive modules weigh 20.8 ounces (1.3 lb) each.

Power requiremements

The input current, power (VA), and dissipation per enclosure listed in this document are based on measurements of fully configured enclosures under worst-case operating conditions. Use the operating maximum values to plan the configuration of your storage system. These values represent either:

the values for a single power supply line cord, or

16

278 ES40

the sum of the values shared by the line cords of the combined power supplies in the same enclosure, with the division between the line cords and supplies at the current sharing ratio (approximately 50% each).

A failure of one of the combined power supplies per enclosure results in the remaining power supply supporting the full load. You must use a rackmount cabinet or rack with appropriate power distribution, and have main branch AC distribution that can handle these values for each enclosure in the cabinet.

Table 218. AC power specifications

Requirement Description

AC line voltage 100 to 240V AC 10%, single-phase, 47 to 63 Hz

AC line current (operating maximum) 2.9 A max at 100V AC

1.6 A max at 200V AC

Power consumption (operating maximum) 287 VA (281 W) max at 100V AC

313 VA (277 W) max at 200V AC

Power factor 0.9 min at full load at 100V AC

0.9 min at full load at 200V AC

Heat dissipation (operating maximum) 1.01 x 106 J/hr (959 Btu/hr) max at 100V AC

1.01 x 106 J/hr (945 Btu/hr) max at 200V AC

In-rush current 30 A max for line cycle, per line cord at 240V AC

Startup surge current 25 A peak max per line cord, max at any line voltage

AC protection 10 A fuse on each power supply, both Line and Neutral

AC inlet type IEC320-C14 appliance coupler, per power zone

Ride-through time 30 ms min

Current sharing Droop Load Sharing

NOTE:

Ratings assume a fully loaded DAE that includes 2 power supplies and 12 worst case disk drive slot numbers.

All power figures shown represent max normal operating numbers with the chassis running in a normal 20C to 25C ambient temperature environment. The chassis power numbers given may increase when running in a higher ambient temperature environment.

For specific product configuration power numbers, refer to the EMC Power Calculator located on the internet at https://powercalculator.emc.com. The Power Calculator will provide the chassis power delta when operating in different ambient temperature ranges and configurations. However, it will only support products with an input voltage range of 200-240V ac.

Table 219. DC power specifications

Requirement Description

DC line voltage -39 to -72V DC (nominal -48 or -60 V power systems)

DC line current (operating maximum) 7.92 A max at -39V DC

6.43 A max at -48V DC

4.39 A max at -72V DC

Power consumption (operating maximum) 309 W max at -39V DC

309 W max at -48V DC

316 W max at -72V DC

Heat dissipation (operating maximum) 1.11 x 106 J/hr (1054 Btu/hr) max at -39V DC

1.11 x 106 J/hr (1054 Btu/hr) max at -48V DC

ES40 279

Table 219. DC power specifications (continued)

Requirement Description

1.14 x 106 J/hr (1078 Btu/hr) max at -72V DC

In-rush current 20 A peak per requirements in EN300 132-2 Sect 4.7 limit curve

DC protection 20 A fuse in each power supply

DC inlet type Positronics PLB3W3M1000

Mating DC connector Positronics PLB3W3F7100A1

Positronics Inc.

http://www.connectpositronic.com

Ride-through time 5 ms min. (test condition: Vin = -40V DC)

Current sharing Droop Load Sharing

NOTE:

Ratings assume a fully loaded DAE that includes 2 power supplies and 15 maximum disk slot numbers.

All power figures shown represent max normal operating numbers with the chassis running in a normal 20C to 25C ambient temperature environment. The chassis power numbers given may increase when running in a higher ambient temperature environment.

The EMC Power Calculator does not support DC chassis.

DAE-to-DAE copper cabling The expansion port interface to and between DAEs is copper cabling. The 100 cables are keyed at either end, and available in 1- 10-meter lengths.

DAE-to-DAE cables are SFF 8088 mini-SAS to mini-SAS. Keys are defined in the T10SAS 2.1 specification.

Product service tag

The serial number is seven alphanumeric characters and found on the service tag.

280 ES40

FS15 This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

Overview of FS15 SSD drives Site requirements FS15 hardware specifications FS15 front panel Back panel Status LEDs

Overview of FS15 SSD drives The FS15 is an external shelf consisting of a specific number of SSD drives, depending upon the system, and are used to cache meta-data.

The SSDs for the FS15 shelf are 800GB 3WPD devices, which have positive performance and longevity characteristics.

Table 220. Number of SSD drives and model compatibilty

Number of Drives Model

2 DD6300 with HA

5 DD6800 with HA DD9300 with HA

8 DD9300 with HA DD9500 - with or without HA

15 DD9500 - with or without HA

NOTE: Unused drive slots have drive fillers to improve airflow.

There are also upgrade kits available to add more SSDs if a system is expanded to have additional memory.

Upgrade Pack Use

3 Drive Upgrade Pack To create a 5 drive shelf from originally a 2 drive shelf or an 8 drive shelf from originally a 5 drive shelf

7 Drive Upgrade Pack To create a 15 drive shelf from an 8 drive shelf

Site requirements This table lists the FS15 site requirements.

Table 221. FS15 site requirements

Requirement FS15 shelf

Vertical Space in Standard 19", 4-post Rack

3U. Do not use a two-post rack. See the slide rail and installation documentation in the packaging for installing in a rack.

Air Conditioning Air conditioning that can cope with the maximum BTU/hr thermal rating.

17

FS15 281

Table 221. FS15 site requirements (continued)

Requirement FS15 shelf

Temperature Controls Adequate temperature control with a gradient (change) not to exceed 30 C in an hour.

Front Bezel Clearance 1.56 inches (4.0 cm) of unobstructed clearance.

Back Panel Clearance 5 inches (12.7 cm) of unobstructed clearance.

Airflow In a closed or multi-unit rack, ensure that the unit has adequate airflow. If the equipment is mounted in an enclosed (as opposed to a four-post open rack), the front and rear doors should have 65% minimum open area for airflow. Whether in an open or enclosed rack, use filler panels to prevent hot air recirculation. The rack design and installation should take into consideration the maximum ambient operating temperature of the equipment, which is 35 C.

Power/ Grounding Two single-phase AC power outlets with an earth ground conductor (safety ground). A safe electrical earth connection must be provided to each power cord. Voltage should be 100-120 VAC or 200-240 VAC; 50 or 60 Hz. Use only with branch circuits protected by a minimum 15A overcurrent protector. Plug the two power cords into separate branch circuit supplies for redundancy.

FS15 hardware specifications

NOTE: All ratings assume a fully configured FS15.

Table 222. FS15 hardware specifications

Specification Description

AC line voltage 100 to 240 Vac 10%, single-phase, 47 to 63 Hz

AC line current (operating maximum) 2.8 A max at 100 Vac, 1.4 A max at 200 Vac

Power consumption (operating maximum) 280 VA (235 W) max

Power factor 0.98 min at full load, low voltage

Heat dissipation (operating maximum) 8.46 x 105 J/hr, (800 Btu/hr) max

Dimensions (rack mounted, with bezel) Width: 17.62" (45 cm) Depth: 14 (35.56cm) Height: 5.25 (13.34cm) 3 RU

Maximum Weight 68 lbs (30.8 kg)

Operating Temperature Ambient temperature: 10o C to 35o C (50o F to 95o F) Temperature gradient: 10o C/hr (180o F/hr) Relative humidity extremes: 20% to 80% noncondensing

Recommended Operating Relative Humidity 40% to 55% noncondensing

Non-Operating Temperature Ambient temperature: -40o C to 65o C (-40o F to 149o F) Temperature gradient: 25o C/hr (45oF/hr) Relative humidity: 10% to 90% noncondensing

FS15 front panel After you unlock and remove the snap-on bezel on the front panel, the 15 disks are visible. Disk numbers, as reported by system commands, range from 1 to 15. When facing the front panel, Disk 1 is located in the leftmost slot in the enclosure and Disk 15 in the rightmost slot.

282 FS15

Figure 173. FS15 front panel (bezel removed)

NOTE: The flanges or sheet metal on the FS15 show 0 to 14 but the software will refer to the logical numbering of 1 to 15.

Each disk in the enclosure has two LEDs. The disks active LED glows green when the disk is functional. The disk fault LED glows amber when the disk has failed.

If there is a problem with the enclosure, the enclosure fault light is amber. The disk enclosure power light should be on (blue) when the shelf is powered on.

When replacing FS15 disks, a good practice is to run this command:

disk beacon .

NOTE: The disk beacon command causes the LED that signals normal operation to flash on the target disk. Enter

Ctrl-C to stop the flash. You can also use the enclosure beacon command to check the LED to blink on every disk.

Figure 174. Front panel LEDs

1. Disk enclosure fault light 2. Disk enclosure power light 3. Disk active light 4. Disk fault light

Table 223. Status lights visible from front of disk enclosure

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Disk enclosure fault light

1 Amber On when any fault condition exists; if the fault is not obvious from a disk module light, look at the back of the disk enclosure.

Disk enclosure power light

1 Blue Power to enclosure is on.

Disk active light 1 per disk module Green No LED when the slot is empty or has a filler module. Also, off when the disk is powered down by command; for example, the result of a temperature fault.

FS15 283

Table 223. Status lights visible from front of disk enclosure (continued)

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Fast blinking when the SATA/SAS drive is powered up but not spinning; this is a normal part of the spin-up sequence, occurring during the spin-up delays of a slot.

On when the drive has power but is not handing any I/O activity (the ready state.

Slow blinking when the drive is spinning and handling I/O activity.

Disk fault light 1 per disk module Amber On when the disk module is faulty, or as an indication to replace the drive.

Back panel For redundancy, the shelf has two identical power supply/cooling modules and two identical shelf controllers which are placed in reverse order.

NOTE: When replacing a component, note its orientation before removing it. Insert the replacement in the same position.

Power supply A and controller A are located at the bottom of the chassis, and power supply B and controller B are located at the top of the chassis.

Figure 175. Back panel: Power modules and controllers

1. LEDs Power supply B: Power LED Power fault: Amber Blower fault: Amber

2. Expansion (Out) 3. Host (In) 4. Enclosure address (not used) 5. Power (Green) or Fault (Amber) 6. Bus ID (not used) 7. Host link active 8. Expansion link active 9. LEDs

Power supply A Power LED Power fault: Amber Blower fault: Amber

284 FS15

Figure 176. Power Supply A LEDs

Each shelf controller has two SAS ports. The port labeled with a circle symbol is the Host port, and the port labeled with a diamond symbol is the Expansion port. The Expansion ports are located on the outside, and the Host ports on the inside (reversed controller positions).

Table 224. Status lights visible from rear of disk enclosure

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Controller Power 1 per Controller Blue or Green On when the Controller is powered on.

Controller Fault 1 per Controller Amber On when either the Controller or a SAS connection is faulty. On during power-on self-test

Host Link Active 1 per Controller Blue On when the host connection is active.

Expansion Link Active 1 per Controller Blue On when the expansion connection is active.

Power Supply Active 1 per power supply Green On when the power supply is operating.

Power Supply Fault* 1 per power supply Amber On when the power supply is faulty or is not receiving AC line voltage.

Flashing when either a multiple blower or ambient over temperature condition has shut off DC power to the system.

Blower Fault* 1 per power supply Amber On when one of the blowers in the power supply is faulty.

*The ES30 and continue to run with a single power supply and three of its four blowers. Removing a power/cooling module constitutes a multiple blower fault condition, and powers down the shelf unless you replace a module within two minutes.

Status LEDs Verify the status by checking the LEDs. Controller B is located above Controller A in the center of the rear panel. The power supply/cooling units are above and below the controllers.

Facing the back panel of the FS15, the Expander ports are the outer of the two ports; the Host ports are the inner of the two ports. The ports are identified by symbols on the rear panel: a circle symbol indicates a Host port; a diamond symbol indicates an Expander port.

FS15 285

Figure 177. Rear panel overview

Table 225. Status LEDs

Light Quantity Color Meaning

Controller power 1 per controller Green On when the controller is powered on

Controller failure 1 per controller Amber On when either the controller or a SAS connection has failed. On during a power-on self test.

Host link active 1 per controller Blue On when the host connection is active

Expansion link active 1 per controller Blue On when the expansion host is active

286 FS15

FS25

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topics:

Overview of FS25 SSD drives Dimensions and weight Power requirements DAE-to-DAE copper cabling Product service tag

Overview of FS25 SSD drives The FS25 is an external shelf consisting of a specific number of SSD drives, depending upon the system, and are used to cache meta-data.

Table 226. Number of SSD drives and model compatibilty

Number of Drives Model

2 DD6900 only with HA

5 DD9400 only with HA

10 DD9900

NOTE: Unused drive slots have drive fillers to improve airflow.

Dimensions and weight Table 227. Dimensions and weight

Dimensions Vertical size Weight (see note)

Height: 3.40 in (8.64 cm)

2 NEMA units 44.61 lb (20.23 kg) with 25 disksWidth: 17.50 in (44.45 cm)

Depth: 14.0 in (35.56 cm)

Note: The weight does not include mounting rails. Allow 5-10 lb (2.3-4.5 kg) for a rail set. The weights listed in this table do not describe enclosures with solid state disk drives with Flash memory (called Flash or SSD drives). These Flash drive modules weigh 20.8 ounces (1.3 lb) each.

Power requirements The input current, power (VA), and heat dissipation per enclosure listed in this document are based on measurements of fully configured enclosures under worst-case operating conditions. Use the operating maximum values to plan the configuration of your storage system. These values represent either:

values for a single power supply line cord, or the sum of the values shared by the line cords of the combined power supplies in the same enclosure, with the division

between the line cords and supplies at the current sharing ratio (approximately 50% each).

18

FS25 287

A failure of one of the combined power supplies per enclosure results in the remaining power supply supporting the full load. You must use a rackmount cabinet or rack with appropriate power distribution, and have main branch AC distribution that can handle these values for each enclosure in the cabinet.

Table 228. AC power specifications

Requirement Description

AC line voltage 100 to 240V AC 10%, single-phase, 47 to 63 Hz

AC line current (operating maximum) 4.5 A max at 100V AC

2.4 A max at 200V AC

Power consumption (operating maximum) 453 VA (432 W) max, at 100V AC

585 VA (427 W) max, at 200V AC

Power factor 0.95 min at full load, @ 100V AC

0.95 min at full load, @ 200Vac

Heat dissipation (normal operating maximum) 1.56 x 106 J/hr. (1,474 Btu/hr.) max @ 100V AC

1.54 x 106 J/hr, (1,457 Btu/hr) max @ 200Vac

In-rush current 30 Apk "cold" per line cord at any line voltage

Startup surge current 40 Apk "hot" per line cord, at any line voltage

AC protection 15 A fuse on each power supply, single line

AC inlet type IEC320-C14 appliance coupler, per power zone

Ride-through time 12 ms min

Current sharing 5% of full load, between power supplies

NOTE:

Ratings assume a fully loaded DAE that includes 2 power supplies and 25 worst case disk drive slot numbers.

All power figures shown represent max normal operating numbers with the chassis running in a normal 20C to 25C ambient temperature environment. The chassis power numbers given may increase when running in a higher ambient temperature environment.

For specific product configuration power numbers, refer to the EMC Power Calculator located on the internet at https://powercalculator.emc.com. The Power Calculator will provide the chassis power delta when operating in different ambient temperature ranges and configurations. However, it will only support products with an input voltage range of 200-240V ac.

Table 229. DC power specifications

Requirement Description

DC line voltage -39 to -72V DC (nominal -48 or -60 V power systems)

DC line current (operating maximum) 11.0 A max at -39V DC

9.10 A max at -48V DC

6.20 A max at -72V DC

Power consumption (operating maximum) 428 W max at -39V DC

437 W max at -48V DC

448 W max at -72V DC

Heat dissipation (operating maximum) 1.54 x 106 J/hr (1460 Btu/hr) max at -39V DC

1.57 x 106 J/hr (1491 Btu/hr) max at -48V DC

1.61 x 106 J/hr (1529 Btu/hr) max at -72V DC

In-rush current 40 A peak per requirements in EN300 132-2 Sect 4.7 limit curve

288 FS25

Table 229. DC power specifications (continued)

Requirement Description

DC protection 50 A fuse in each power supply

DC inlet type Positronics PLBH3W3M4B0A1/AA

Mating DC connector Positronics PLBH3W3F0000/AA

Positronics Inc.

http://www.connectpositronic.com

Ride-through time 1 ms min. at -50V input

Current sharing 5% of full load, between power supplies

NOTE:

Ratings assume a fully loaded DAE that includes 2 power supplies and 25 maximum disk slot numbers.

All power figures shown represent max normal operating numbers with the chassis running in a normal 20C to 25C ambient temperature environment. The chassis power numbers given may increase when running in a higher ambient temperature environment.

The EMC Power Calculator does not support DC chassis.

DAE-to-DAE copper cabling The expansion port interface to and between DAEs is copper cabling. The 10

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the DD OS 7.1 Dell works, you can view and download the Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Features And Specifications for Dell DD OS 7.1 as well as other Dell manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Features And Specifications should include all the details that are needed to use a Dell DD OS 7.1. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Dell DD OS 7.1 PowerProtect Hardware Operating System Features And Specifications as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.